SUMMARY - Salescredit

162
SALES CREDIT AND TRANSACTION BONSATO V. CA 95 PHIL 481 FACTS: Respondents sought the annulment of the deeds of donation on the ground that it wasn’t in compliance with the formalities of a will. The petitioners on the other hand claim that they are valid donations and that they were not donations mortis causa. HELD: If there has been no badge that it is a donation mortis causa, it should be considered as a donation inter vivos. PUIG V. PENAFLORIDA 16 SCRA 136 FACTS: Penaflorida contends that the donation effected was a donation inter vivos even if the disposition of the property was reserved with Parcon. HELD: The donation notwithstanding, if there is reservation of the right of disposition, the donation is mortis causa and not inter vivos. REPUBLIC V. CA 132 SCRA 514 FACTS: Respondents sought the registration of land adjacent to their fishpond. They are the registered owners of parcel of lot bordering on the Bocaue and Meycauyan rivers. The lower and appellate court allowed registration but this was opposed by the government. HELD: There is no accretion if by man-made causes. VILLANUEVA V. CASTANEDA 154 SCRA 142 FACTS: Petitioners claim the right to remain in and conduct business in the area (talipapa) by virtue of a previous authorization granted to them by the municipal government. The respondents denied this and alleged that the demolitions of the stalls were not illegal. HELD: A public plaza is beyond the commerce of man and so cannot be the subject of lease or any other commercial undertaking. SERG’S PRODUCTS AND GOQUIOLAY V. PCI LEASING AND FINANCE 338 SCRA 499 1

description

Summary digest cases

Transcript of SUMMARY - Salescredit

Page 1: SUMMARY - Salescredit

SALES CREDIT AND TRANSACTIONBONSATO V. CA

95 PHIL 481FACTS:Respondents sought the annulment of the deeds of donation on the ground that it wasn’t in compliance with the formalities of a will. The petitioners on the other hand claim that they are valid donations and that they were not donations mortis causa.HELD:If there has been no badge that it is a donation mortis causa, it should be considered as a donation inter vivos.

PUIG V. PENAFLORIDA16 SCRA 136

FACTS: Penaflorida contends that the donation effected was a donation inter vivos even if the disposition of the property was reserved with Parcon.HELD:The donation notwithstanding, if there is reservation of the right of disposition, the donation is mortis causa and not inter vivos.

REPUBLIC V. CA 132 SCRA 514

 FACTS: Respondents  sought  the  registration  of  land  adjacent  to  their  fishpond.  They  are  the  registered  owners  of  parcel  of  lot  bordering  on  the  Bocaue and Meycauyan rivers.  The lower and appellate court allowed registration but this was opposed by the government.  HELD: There is no accretion if by man-made causes.

VILLANUEVA V. CASTANEDA  154 SCRA 142

 FACTS: Petitioners  claim  the  right  to  remain  in  and  conduct  business  in  the  area (talipapa)  by  virtue  of  a  previous  authorization  granted  to  them  by  the municipal government.   The respondents denied this and alleged that the demolitions of the stalls were not illegal.    HELD: A  public  plaza  is  beyond  the  commerce  of  man  and  so  cannot  be  the subject of lease or any other commercial undertaking.  

SERG’S PRODUCTS AND GOQUIOLAY V. PCI  LEASING  AND FINANCE 338 SCRA 499

 FACTS: PCI  filed  a  case  for  collection  of  a  sum  of  money  as  well  as  a  writ  of replevin  for  the  seizure  of  machineries,  subject  of  a  chattel  mortgage executed by petitioner in favor of PCI.  Machineries  of  petitioner  were  seized  and  petitioner  filed  a  motion  for special protective order.  It asserts that the machineries were real property and could not be subject of a chattel mortgage.  HELD: The  machineries  in  question  have  become  immobilized  by  destination because they are essential and principal elements in the industry, and thus have become immovable in nature.

1

Page 2: SUMMARY - Salescredit

 Nonetheless, they are still proper subjects for a chattel mortgage.  Contracting parties may validly stipulate that a real property be considered as  personal.    After  agreement,  they  are  consequently  estopped  from claiming otherwise.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SEQUESTRATION OR JUDICIAL DEPOSIT

  Art.  2005.  A  judicial  deposit  or  sequestration  takes  place when  an  attachment  or  seizure  of  property  in  litigation  is ordered. (1785)

Art.  2006. Movable as  well as immovable property may be the object of sequestration. (1786)  Art.    2007.    The    depositary    of    property    or    objects sequestrated  cannot  be  relieved  of  his  responsibility  until the  controversy  which  gave  rise  thereto  has  come  to  an end, unless the court so orders. (1787a)  Art. 2008. The depositary of property sequestrated is bound to comply, with respect to the same, with all the obligations of a good father of a family. (1788)  

WHEN JUDICIAL DEPOSIT TAKES PLACE

     A deposit may be constituted judicially or extrajudicially     Takes place when an attachment or seizure of property in litigation is ordered by the court  

NATURE AND PURPOSE OF JUDICIAL DEPOSIT

     Judicial deposit is auxiliary to a case pending in court      Purpose is to maintain the status quo during the pendency of the litigation or to insure the rights of the parties to the property in case of a favorable judgment  

OBLIGATION OF DEPOSITARY OF SEQUESTRATED PROPERTY

     The  depositary  of  sequestered  property  is  the  person appointed by the court      He  has  the  obligation  to  take  care  of  the  property  with diligence  of a good father  of  a family  and  he  may not be relieved of his responsibility until the litigation is ended or the court so orders  Art.  2009.  As  to  matters  not  provided  for  in  this  Code, judicial  sequestration  shall  be  governed  by  the  Rules  of Court. (1789)  

APPLICABLE LAW

     The  law  on  judicial  deposit  is  remedial  and  the  Rules  of Court is thus applicable      Rule   57   on   preliminary   attachment,   Rule   59   on receivership, and Rule 60 on replevin.

THE WAREHOUSE RECEIPTS LAW

WHO MAY ISSUE WAREHOUSE RECEIPT?

> A warehouseman is  a  person  lawfully  engaged  in  the business of storing goods for profit. > Only a warehouseman may issue warehouse receipts  

2

Page 3: SUMMARY - Salescredit

WHAT SHOULD BE DONE TO PUT THE RECEIPT WITHIN THE PURVIEW OF WAREHOUSE RECEIPTS LAW?

> The   warehouse   receipt   should   be   issued   by   the warehouseman  FORM OF RECEIPTS; ESSENTIAL TERMS 1.   The location of the warehouse where the goods are stored 2.   The date of issue of the receipt  3.   Consecutive number of the receipt 4.   A statement whether the goods received  will be  delivered to the bearer, to a specified person or to a specified person or his order 5.   The rate of storage charges 6.   A  description  of  the  goods  or  of  the  packages  containing them 7.   The  signature  of  the  warehouseman  which  may  be  made by his authorized agent 8.   If   the   receipt   is   issued   for   goods   of   which   the warehouseman  is  owner,  either  solely  or  jointly  or  in common with others, the fact of such ownership 9.   A  statement  of  the  amount  of  advances  made  and  of liabilities  incurred  for  which  the  warehouseman  claims  as lien.  If the precise amount for such advances made or of such liabilities incurred is, at the same time of the issue of the receipt, unknown to the warehouseman or to his agent who issues it, a statement of the fact that advances have been made or liabilities incurred and the purpose thereof is sufficient  

EFFECT OF OMISSION OF THE ESSENTIAL CONTENTS

> A  warehouseman  shall  be  liable  to  any  person  injured thereby  all  damages  caused  by  the  omission  from  a negotiable receipt of any of the terms herein required  > Validity of the receipt not affected > Negotiability of the receipt not affected

TERMS  THAT  CANNOT  BE  INCLUDED  IN  THE  WAREHOUSE RECEIPT

1.   Those contrary to any provision of the law 2.   In  any  wise  impair  the  warehouseman’s  obligation  to exercise  that  degree  of  care  in  the  safekeeping  of  the goods  entrusted  to  him  which  a  reasonably  careful  man would exercise with regard to similar goods of his own  

NON-NEGOTIABLE WAREHOUSE RECEIPT

> Receipt in which it is stated that the goods received will be delivered to the depositor or to any specified person   NEGOTIABLE WAREHOUSE RECEIPT > Receipt in which it is stated that the goods received will be delivered  to  the  bearer  or  to  the  order  of  any  person named in such receipt > No provision shall be inserted in a negotiable receipt that it is non-negotiable.  Such provision if inserted shall be void.  DUPLICATE RECEIPTS MUST BE MARKED > When  more  than  one  is  issued  for  the  same  goods,  the word  “duplicate”  shall  be  plainly  placed  upon  the  face  of every such receipt, except the first one issued > A  warehouseman  shall  be  held  liable  for  damages  for failure to do so to anyone who purchased the subsequent receipt  for  value  supposing  it  to  be  original,  even  though the  purchaser  be  after  the  delivery  of  the  goods  by  the warehouseman to the holder of the original receipt

3

Page 4: SUMMARY - Salescredit

 OBLIGATIONS  AND   RIGHTS  OF  WAREHOUSEMAN  UPON THEIR RECEIPTS

 PRINCIPAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE WAREHOUSEMAN 1.   To take care of the goods entrusted to his safekeeping 2.   To  deliver  them  to  the  holder  of  the  receipt  or  the depositor  provided  the  following  conditions  are  fulfilled—there is demand by the depositor accompanied by either a.    An offer to satisfy the warehouseman’s lien b.   An offer to surrender the receipt, if negotiable with such  indorsements  as  would  be  necessary  for  the negotiation of the receipts c.    A  readiness  and  willingness  to  sign,  when  the goods  are  delivered,  an  acknowledgement  that they  have  been  delivered,  if  such  signature  is requested by the warehouseman  

WHAT SHOULD ACCOMPANY THE DEMAND FOR THE RETURN OF THE GOODS?

1.   An offer to satisfy the warehouseman’s lien 2.   An  offer  to  surrender  the  receipt,  if  negotiable  with  such indorsements as would be necessary for the negotiation of the receipts 3.   A  readiness  and  willingness  to  sign,  when  the  goods  are delivered,   an  acknowledgement  that  they   have  been delivered,   if   such   signature   is   requested   by   the warehouseman  

A  WAREHOUSEMAN  IS  JUSTIFIED  IN  DELIVERING  THE GOODS TO ONE WHO IS—

1.   Person lawfully entitled to the possession of the goods, or his agent 2.   Person who either himself entitled to delivery by the terms of the non-negotiable receipt issued for the goods, or who has  written  authority  from  the  person  so  entitled  either endorsed upon the receipt or written on another paper 3.   Person in possession  of  a  negotiable receipt  by the  terms of  which  the  goods  are  deliverable  to  him  or  order,  or  to bearer,  or which  has been indorsed to  him or in blank by the person to whom delivery was promised by the terms of the receipt or by his mediate or immediate indorser  

WAREHOUSEMAN’S LIABILITY FOR MISDELIVERY

> Where  a  warehouseman  delivers the goods to  one  who is not in fact lawfully entitled to the possession of them, the warehouseman  shall  be  liable  for  conversion/estafa  to  all having a right of property or possession in the goods if he delivered the goods otherwise than as authorized > And though he delivered the goods as authorized he shall be so liable if prior to such delivery he had either— o     Been  requested,  by  or  on  behalf  of  the  person lawfully   entitled   to   a   right   of   property   or possession in the goods, not to make such delivery o     Had  information  that  the  delivery  about  to  be made  was  to  one  not  lawfully  entitled  to  the possession of the goods   

WHAT IS CONVERSION?

> Unauthorized  assumption  and  exercise  of  the  right  of ownership  over  goods  belonging  to  another  through  the alteration of their condition or the exclusion of the owner’s right 

 

4

Page 5: SUMMARY - Salescredit

NEGOTIABLE  RECEIPTS  MUST  BE  CANCELLED  OR  MARKED WHEN   GOODS   DELIVERED   OR   WHEN   PART   OF   IT   IS DELIVERED.      FAILURE   TO   DO   SO   WILL   MAKE   THE WAREHOUSEMAN LIABLE—

> The warehouseman is liable to any one who purchases for value  in  good  faith  such  receipt,  for  failure  to  deliver  the goods to him, whether such purchaser acquired title to the  receipt  before  or  after  the  delivery  of  the  goods  by  the warehouseman  

EFFECT OF ALTERATION ON LIABILITY OF WAREHOUSEMAN

1.   Alteration immaterial—whether fraudulent or  not, whether authorized  or  not,  the  warehouseman  is  liable  on  the altered receipt according to its original tenor 2.   Alteration   material—if   the   alteration   is   material,   but authorized,  the  warehouseman  is  liable  according  to  the terms of the receipt as altered 3.   Material alteration innocently made—the warehouseman is liable on the altered receipt according to its original receipt 4.   Material  alteration  fraudulently  made—warehouseman  is liable  according  to  the  original  tenor  of  the  receipt  to  a purchaser of the receipt for value without notice, and even to  the  alterer  and  subsequent  purchasers  with  notice except    that    as    regards    to    the    last    two,    the warehouseman’s liability is limited only to delivery as he is excused from any liability  NOTA BENE:  it is  clear that even a fraudulent alteration cannot divest   the   title   of   the   owner   of   stored   goods   and   the warehouseman  is,  therefore,  liable  to  return  them  to  the  owner.  But  a  bona  fide  holder  acquires  no  right  to  the  goods  under  a negotiable  receipt  which  has  been  lost  or  stolen  or  to  which  the endorsement of the depositor has been forged.  

LOST OR DESTROYED RECEIPTS

> The  court  may  order  the  delivery  of  the  goods  upon satisfactory proof of such loss or destruction and upon the giving of a bond with sufficient sureties to be approved by the court to protect the warehouseman from any liability or expense, which he or any person injured by such delivery may  incur  by  reason  of  the  original  receipt  remaining outstanding > The  court may also in its discretion order the payment of the warehouseman’s reasonable costs and counsel fees > The order of the court shall not relieve the warehouseman from  liability  to  a  person  to  whom  the  negotiable  receipt as been or shall be negotiated for value without notice of the proceedings or of the delivery of the goods  

LIABILITY OF WAREHOUSEMAN AS TO DUPLICATE—HE WARRANTS

1.   That  the  duplicate  is  an  accurate  copy  of  the  original receipt 2.   Such original receipt is uncancelled at the date of the issue of the duplicate  

WAREHOUSEMAN CANNOT SET UP TITLE IN HIMSELF

> The  warehouseman cannot refuse to deliver the goods on the  ground  that  he  has  acquired  title  or  right  to  the possession  of  the  same  unless  such  title  or  right  is derived— o     Directly  or  indirectly  from  a  transfer  made  by  the depositor at the time of the deposit for storage or subsequent thereto o     From the warehouseman’s lien  

5

Page 6: SUMMARY - Salescredit

INTERPLEADER OF ADVERSE CLAIMANTS

> If  more  than  one  person  claims  the  title  or  possession  of the goods, the warehouseman may, either as a defense to an  action  brought  against  him  for  non-delivery  of  the goods,  or  as  an  original  suit,  whichever  is  appropriate, require all known claimants to interplead  

WAREHOUSEMAN  HAS  REASONABLE  TIME  TO  DETERMINE VALIDITY OF CLAIMS

> If  someone  other  than  the  depositor  or  person  claiming under him has a claim to the title or possession of goods, and the warehouseman has information of such claim, the warehouseman  shall be excused from  liability for refusing to  deliver  the  goods,  either  to  the  depositor  or  person claiming  under  him  or  to  the  adverse  claimant,  until  the warehouseman has had a reasonable time to ascertain the validity of the adverse claim or to bring legal proceedings to compel all claimants to interplead

LIABILITY  OF  WAREHOUSEMAN  FOR  NON-EXISTENCE  OR MISDESCRIPTION OF GOODS

> As a general rule, the warehouseman is under obligation to deliver the identical property stored with him and if he fails to do so, he is liable directly to the owner > As against a bona fide holder of  a warehouse receipt, the warehouseman   is   estopped   whether   the   receipt   is negotiable or not, to deny that he has received the goods described in it  

LIABILITY OF WAREHOUSEMAN FOR LOSS DUE TO LACK OF CARE

> The  warehouseman  is  required  to  exercise  ordinary  or reasonable  care  in  the  custody  of  the  goods,  that  is,  the care  is  reasonably  careful  owner  would  exercise  over similar goods of his own. > The warehouseman isn’t liable for any loss or injury to the goods,  which  couldn’t  have  been  avoided  by  the  exercise of  such  care.    Of  course,  what  constitutes  ordinary  or reasonable  care  depends  upon  the  circumstances  such  as the character and value of the property and the character and location of the warehouse.  

COMMINGLING OF DEPOSITED GOODS

> As a general rule, a warehouseman may not mingle goods belonging to depositors > In case of fungible goods, the warehouseman may mingle them with the goods of the same kind and grade provided that he authorized by agreement or custom > Commingling    is    intended    for    the    benefit    of    the warehouseman.    It  would,  indeed  be  strange  if  the warehouseman  could  escape  his  liability  to  the  owner  of the  goods  by  the  simple  process  of  commingling  them without authorization  

ATTACHMENT OR LEVY OF A NEGOTIABLE RECEIPT

> The  warehouseman  has  the  direct  obligation  to  hold possession  of  the  goods  for  the  original  owner  or  for  the person known the negotiable receipt of title has been duly negotiated.  > While  in  possession  of  such  warehouseman,  the  goods cannot  be  attached  or  levied  upon  under  an  execution unless— o     The document is first surrendered o     Its negotiation is enjoined o     The document is impounded by the court  > This  shall  not  apply  if  the  person  depositing  is  not  the owner of the goods or one who has no right to convey title to the goods binding upon the owner.   > Neither  shall  it  apply  to  actions  for  recovery  or  manual delivery of goods by the real owner nor to cases where the attachment is made before the issuance of the  negotiable receipt of title  

6

Page 7: SUMMARY - Salescredit

CREDITOR’S REMEDIES TO REACH NEGOTIABLE RECEIPTS

> A creditor whose debtor is the owner of negotiable receipt shall  be  entitled  to  such  aid  from  courts  of  appropriate jurisdiction, by injunction and otherwise, in attaching such receipt  or  in  satisfying  the  claim  by  means  thereof  as  is allowed  by  law  or  in  equity  in  regard  to  property  which cannot  be  readily  be  attached  or  levied  upon  by  ordinary legal process  

WHAT  CLAIMS  ARE  INCLUDED  IN  THE  WAREHOUSEMAN’S LIEN

1.   All  lawful  charges  for  storage  and  preservation  of  the goods 2.   All    lawful    claims    for    money    advanced—Interests, Insurance,  Transportation,  Labor,  Weighing,  Cooperating and other charges and expenses in relation to the goods 3.   All  reasonable  charges   and  expenses   for  notice  and advertisements of sale 4.   Sale  of  goods  where  default  has  been  made  in  satisfying warehouseman’s lien 

AGAINST WHAT PROPERTY THE LIEN MAY BE ENFORCED

1.   Against  all  goods,  whenever  deposited,  belonging  to  the person who is liable to the debtor for the claims in regard to which the lien is asserted 2.   Against  all  goods  belonging  to  others  which  have  been deposited at any time by the person who is liable as debtor for  claims  in  regard  to  which  the  lien  is  asserted  if  such person  had  been  entrusted  with  the  possession  of  the goods that a pledge of the same by him at the time of the deposit to one who took the goods in good faith for value would have been valid  

HOW WAREHOUSEMAN LOSES HIS LIEN

1. By surrendering possession thereof 2. By refusing to  deliver the goods  when a demand is  made with  which he is bound to comply under

the provisions of the law

LIEN WHERE RECEIPT NEGOTIABLE

> With  the  exception  of  the  charges  for  the  storage  or preservation  of  goods  for  which  a  negotiable  receipt  has been  issued,  the  lien  exists  only  for  the  other  charges expressly  enumerated  in  the  receipt  so  far  as  they  are written although the amount of the said charge isn’t stated  

OTHER  THINGS  IN  CONNECTION  TO  WAREHOUSEMAN’S LIEN

1.   Warehouseman need not deliver lien is satisfied 2.   Warehouseman’s lien doesn’t preclude other remedies  

SATISFACTION OF LIEN BY SALE

1.   The  warehouseman  shall  give  a  written  notice  to  the person  on whose  account the goods  are  held, and to  any other  person  known  by  the  warehouseman  to  claim  an interest  in  the  goods.    Such  notice  shall  be  given  by delivery  in  person  or  by  registered  mail  addressed  to  the last known place of business or abode of the person to be notified. 2.   The notice shall contain— a.    An  itemized  statement  of  the  claim,  showing  the sum  due  at  the  time  of  the  notice  and  the  dates when it became due b.   A brief description of the goods c.    A demand that such amount of the claim as stated shall be paid on or before the day mentioned, not

7

Page 8: SUMMARY - Salescredit

less than 10 days from the delivery of the notice if it  is  personally  delivered,  or  from  the  time  when the notice  shall reach  its destination,  according to due course of post, if the notice is sent by mail d.   A statement that unless the claim is paid within the time specified, the goods will be advertised for sale and sold by auction at a specified time and place  

ENFORCEMENT OF WAREHOUSEMAN’S LIEN

1.   By refusing to deliver the goods until the lien is satisfied 2.   By  causing  the  extrajudicial  sale  of  the  property  and applying the proceeds to the value of the lien 3.   By filing a  civil action for collection of the  unpaid charges or  by  way  of  counterclaim  in  an  action  to  recover  the property from him  

EFFECT OF SALE OF GOODS

1.   In  case  of  sale  of  goods,  the  warehouseman  is  not  liable for  nondelivery  even  if  the  receipt  given  for  the  goods when they were deposited be negotiated. 2.   When   the   sale   was   made   without   the   publication requirement  and  before  the  time  specified  by  law,  such sale  is  void  and  the  purchaser  of  the  goods  acquires  no title in them.  

ACTS FOR WHICH WAREHOUSEMAN IS LIABLE

1.   Failure to stamp duplicate on copies of negotiable receipt 2.   Failure  to  place  non-negotiable  or  not  negotiable  on  the not negotiable receipt 3.   Misdelivery of the goods 4.   Failure  to  effect  cancellation  of  a  negotiable  receipt  upon delivery of the goods  5.   Issuing  receipt  for  non-existing  goods  or  misdescribed goods 6.   Failure to take care of the goods 7.   Failure to give notice in case of sale of goods to satisfy the lien or because the goods are perishable or hazardous  

NEGOTIATION AND TRANSFER OF RECEIPTS

NEGOTIATION OF NEGOTIABLE RECEIPT BY DELIVERY

1.   Where  by  the  terms  of  the  receipt,  the  warehouseman undertakes to deliver the goods to the bearer 2.   Where  by  the  terms  of  the  receipt,  the  warehouseman undertakes to deliver the goods to the order of a specified person, and such  person  or a  subsequent indorsee  of the receipt has indorsed it in blank or to bearer a.    Where by the terms  of the receipt, the goods  are deliverable to bearer or where a negotiable receipt has  been  indorsed  in  blank  or  bearer,  any  holder may  indorse  the  same  to  himself  or  to  any  other specified person, and in such case the receipt shall thereafter  be  negotiated  only  by  the  indorsement by such indorsee  NEGOTIATION OF NEGOTIABLE RECEIPT BY INDORSEMENT 1.   If  indorsed  in  blank  or  to  bearer,  the  document  becomes negotiable by delivery 2.   If  indorsed  to  a   specified   person,  it  may  be   again negotiated by the indorsement of such person in blank, to bearer or to another specified person.  Delivery alone isn’t sufficient.   

TRANSFER OF NON-NEGOTIABLE RECEIPT

> A non-negotiable receipt of title cannot be negotiated. > Nevertheless, it can be transferred or assigned by delivery > The assignee  or transferee  only acquires the rights of the transferor or assignor  

8

Page 9: SUMMARY - Salescredit

ADVANTAGES OF A NEGOTIABLE WAREHOUSE RECEIPT

1.   It protects a purchaser for value and in good faith 2.   The  goods  covered by the receipt cannot be garnished  or levied  upon  under  execution  unless  it  is  surrendered,  or impounded, or its negotiation enjoined 3.   In  case  of  negotiation,  the  holder  acquires  the  direct obligation of the warehouseman to hold possession of the goods for him without notice to such warehouseman 4.   The  goods  it  covers  aren’t  subject  to  seller’s  lien  or stoppage in transitu  

WHO MAY NEGOTIATE A RECEIPT

1.   By the owner thereof 2.   By  any person to  whom the  possession  or  custody  of the receipt has been entrusted by the owner, if by the terms of the  receipt,  the  warehouseman  undertakes  to  deliver  the goods to the order of the person to whom the possession or  custody  of the receipt  has  been entrusted,  or  if  at the same time  of such entrusting, the receipt is in such form that it may be negotiated by delivery  

RIGHTS   OF   PERSON   TO   WHOM   RECEIPT   HAS   BEEN NEGOTIATED

1.   The  title  of  the  person  negotiating  the  receipt  over  the goods covered by the receipt 2.   The title of the person to whose order by the terms of the receipt the goods were to be delivered over such goods 3.   The   direct   obligation   of   the   warehouseman   to   hold possession of the goods for  him,  as if the  warehouseman directly contracted with him  

RIGHTS   OF   PERSON   TO   WHOM   RECEIPT   HAS   BEEN TRANSFERRED

1.   Title to the goods as against the transferor 2.   The  right  to  notify  the  warehouseman  of  the  transfer thereof 3.   The  right  thereafter  to  acquire  the  obligation  of  the warehouseman to hold the goods for him  

RIGHTS OF TRANSFEREE OF NEGOTIABLE RECEIPT

1.   The right to the goods as against the transferor  2.   The right to compel the transferor to indorse the receipt  

RULE WHERE RECEIPT IS SUBSEQUENTLY INDORSED

> For the purpose of determining whether the transferee is a purchaser  for  value  in  good  faith  without  notice,  the negotiation  shall  take  effect  as  of  the  time  when  the indorsement is actually made not at the time the receipt is delivered > Reason for the rule: negotiation becomes complete only at the time of indorsement  

WARRANTIES ON SALE OF RECEIPT

1.   That the receipt is genuine 2.   That he has a legal right to negotiate or transfer it 3.   That  he has knowledge of no fact which  would impair the validity of the worth of the receipt 4.   That  he  has a right to transfer the title to the  goods and that  the  goods  are  merchantable  or  fit  for  a  particular purpose,  whenever  such  warranties  would  have  been implied, if the contract of the parties had been to transfer without a receipt of the goods represented thereby  

9

Page 10: SUMMARY - Salescredit

INDORSER, NOT A GUARANTOR

> The  indorsement  of  a  receipt  doesn’t  make  the  indorser liable for  any failure  on the part of the warehouseman  or previous  indorser  of  the  receipt  to  fulfill  their  respective obligations  

NO WARRANTY IMPLIED  FROM ACCEPTING PAYMENT  OF A DEBT

> A  mortgagee,  pledgee  or  holder  for  security  of  a  receipt who,  in  good  faith,  demands  or  receives  payment  of  the debt  for  which  such  receipt  is  security,  whether  from  a party  to  a  draft  drawn  for  such  debt  or  from  any  other person, shall not, by so doing, be deemed to represent or to warrant the genuineness of such receipt or the quantity or quality of the goods therein described > In other words, the holder of a security who in good faith accepts payment of a debt from a person doesn’t warrant thereby  the  genuineness  of  the  receipt  nor  the  quality  or quantity of the goods therein described

WHEN  NEGOTIATION  NOT  IMPAIRED  BY  FRAUD,  DURESS, MISTAKE

> The validity of the negotiation of a receipt isn’t impaired by the fact that such negotiation was a breach of duty on the part  of the person making the  negotiation,  or by the fact that  the  owner  of  the  receipt  was  induced  by  fraud, mistake or duress to entrust the possession or custody of the  receipt  to  such  person,  if  the  person  to  whom  the receipt was negotiated, or to a person to whom the receipt is  subsequently  negotiated  paid  value  therefor,  without notice of the breach of duty, fraud, mistake or duress  

EFFECT OF SUBSEQUENT NEGOTIATION BY SELLER, ETC.

> The purchaser, mortgagee, or pledgee of goods for which a negotiable  receipt  has  been  issued,  or  of  the  negotiable receipt itself, has the duty to require the negotiation of the receipt  to  him  otherwise,  his  failure  will  have  the  same effect as an express authorization on his part to the seller, mortgagor,  or  pledgor  in  possession  of  such  receipt  to make subsequent negotiation > The subsequent purchaser must have taken the receipt in  good faith and for value in order to acquire a better right   

INDORSEE’S RIGHT SUPERIOR TO VENDOR’S LIEN

> An  innocent  holder  of  a  negotiable  receipt  has  a  better right to the goods for  which the receipt is given than the vendor who has a vendor’s lien upon such goods > Warehouseman  isn’t  obliged  to  deliver  or  justified  in delivering the goods to an unpaid seller unless the receipt is first surrendered for cancellation  

HOW  DO  YOU  ATTACH  OR  IMPOSE  A  LIEN  OVER  GOODS COVERED BY A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT? 

If it is not negotiable, the court would issue a writ of attachment.  If it is negotiable, the court  should  require  the  surrender  of  the  receipt  and  restrict further negotiations. 

EFFECTS   OF   DEATH   OF   INSOLVENT   DEBTOR   PENDING INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS IT DEPENDS— 1.   If the debtor  shall die after the  order of adjudication, the proceedings  shall  be  continued  and  concluded  in  like manner and with like validity, and effect as if he had lived 2.   If  the  death  occurs  before  the  order  of  adjudication,  the proceedings  shall  be  discontinued.    The  claims  must  be filed  in  the  proper  testate  or  intestate  proceedings  as provided  for  in  the  R/C  on  the  settlement  of  decedent’s estate  DUTY    OF    COURT    WHERE    PROPERTY    EXEMPT    FROM EXECUTION

10

Page 11: SUMMARY - Salescredit

     It shall be the duty of the court having jurisdiction of the proceedings, upon petition and after hearing held upon due notice, to exempt and set apart, for the use and benefit of the insolvent, such real and personal property as is by law exempt from execution  WHEN INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS DEEMED TO COMMENCE      The filing off a petition by or against a debtor upon which, or  upon amendment  of  which,  an  order  of adjudication in insolvency  may  be  made,  shall  be  deemed  to  be  the commencement of proceedings in insolvency under the Act  WHEN RECEIVER MAY BE APPOINTED Upon  the  filing  of  either  a  voluntary  or  involuntary  petition  in insolvency, a receiver may be appointed by the court in which the proceeding is pending,  or  by  a judge thereof, at any time before the  election  of  an  assignee,  when  it  appears  by  the  verified petition of a creditor: 1.   That the assets of the insolvent, or a considerable portion thereof,   have   been   pledged,   mortgaged,   transferred, assigned,   conveyed,   or   seized,   on   legal   process,   in contravention  or  violation  of  the  provisions  of  section seventy of this Act, and  2.   That it is necessary to commence an action to recover the same. The appointment, oath, undertaking, and powers of such  receiver  shall  in  all  respects  be  regulated  by  the general   laws   of   the   Philippine   Islands   applicable   to receivers.       When  an  assignee  is  chosen,  and  has  qualified,  the receiver  shall  forthwith  return  to  court  an  account  of  the assets and property which have come into his possession, and  of  his  disbursements,  and  a  report  of  all  actions  or proceedings  commenced  by  him  for  the  recovery  of  any property  belonging  to  the  estate,  and  the  court  shall thereupon   summarily   hear   and   settle   the   receiver's account,  and  shall  allow  him  a  just  compensation  for  his services   and   his   expenses,   including   a   reasonable attorney's  fee,  whereupon  the  receiver  shall  deliver  all property, assets, or effects remaining in his hands, to the assignee  who  shall  be  substituted  for  the  receiver  in  all pending actions or proceedings.  WHEN PETITION MAY BE DISMISSED 1.   Upon  the  application  of  the  debtor,  if  it  be  voluntary petition, if no creditor files a written objection 2.   If  a  creditor's  petition,  dismiss  the  petition  and  the discontinue   the   proceedings   at   any   time   before   the appointment of an assignee 3.   After the appointment of an assignee, no dismissal shall be made  without  the  consent  of  all  parties  interested  in  or affected thereby.

EFFECTS   OF   DEATH   OF   INSOLVENT   DEBTOR   PENDING INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS

IT DEPENDS— 1.   If the debtor  shall die after the  order of adjudication, the proceedings  shall  be  continued  and  concluded  in  like manner and with like validity, and effect as if he had lived 2.   If  the  death  occurs  before  the  order  of  adjudication,  the proceedings  shall  be  discontinued.    The  claims  must  be filed  in  the  proper  testate  or  intestate  proceedings  as provided  for  in  the  R/C  on  the  settlement  of  decedent’s estate  

DUTY    OF    COURT    WHERE    PROPERTY    EXEMPT    FROM EXECUTION

     It shall be the duty of the court having jurisdiction of the proceedings, upon petition and after hearing held upon due notice, to exempt and set apart, for the use and benefit of the insolvent, such real and personal property as is by law exempt from execution  

WHEN INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS DEEMED TO COMMENCE

11

Page 12: SUMMARY - Salescredit

     The filing off a petition by or against a debtor upon which, or  upon amendment  of  which,  an  order  of adjudication in insolvency  may  be  made,  shall  be  deemed  to  be  the commencement of proceedings in insolvency under the Act  

WHEN RECEIVER MAY BE APPOINTED

Upon  the  filing  of  either  a  voluntary  or  involuntary  petition  in insolvency, a receiver may be appointed by the court in which the proceeding is pending,  or  by  a judge thereof, at any time before the  election  of  an  assignee,  when  it  appears  by  the  verified petition of a creditor: 1.   That the assets of the insolvent, or a considerable portion thereof,   have   been   pledged,   mortgaged,   transferred, assigned,   conveyed,   or   seized,   on   legal   process,   in contravention  or  violation  of  the  provisions  of  section seventy of this Act, and  2.   That it is necessary to commence an action to recover the same. The appointment, oath, undertaking, and powers of such  receiver  shall  in  all  respects  be  regulated  by  the general   laws   of   the   Philippine   Islands   applicable   to receivers.       When  an  assignee  is  chosen,  and  has  qualified,  the receiver  shall  forthwith  return  to  court  an  account  of  the assets and property which have come into his possession, and  of  his  disbursements,  and  a  report  of  all  actions  or proceedings  commenced  by  him  for  the  recovery  of  any property  belonging  to  the  estate,  and  the  court  shall thereupon   summarily   hear   and   settle   the   receiver's account,  and  shall  allow  him  a  just  compensation  for  his services   and   his   expenses,   including   a   reasonable attorney's  fee,  whereupon  the  receiver  shall  deliver  all property, assets, or effects remaining in his hands, to the assignee  who  shall  be  substituted  for  the  receiver  in  all pending actions or proceedings.

WHEN PETITION MAY BE DISMISSED

1.   Upon  the  application  of  the  debtor,  if  it  be  voluntary petition, if no creditor files a written objection 2.   If  a  creditor's  petition,  dismiss  the  petition  and  the discontinue   the   proceedings   at   any   time   before   the appointment of an assignee 3.   After the appointment of an assignee, no dismissal shall be made  without  the  consent  of  all  parties  interested  in  or affected thereby.

OLUNTARY DEPOSIT

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art.  1968. A voluntary deposit is that  wherein  the delivery is made by the will of the depositor. A deposit may also be made  by  two  or  more  persons  each  of  whom  believes himself entitled to the thing deposited with a third person, who shall deliver it in a proper case to the one to whom it belongs. (1763)  

VOLUNTARY DEPOSIT

     One  wherein  the  delivery  is  made  by  the  will  of  the depositor      Generally,  the  depositor  must  be  the  owner  of  the  thing deposited      But it may belong to another person       The depositary cannot dispute the title of the depositor to the thing deposited  

WHERE THERE ARE SEVERAL DEPOSITORS

12

Page 13: SUMMARY - Salescredit

     Two  or  more  persons  each  claiming  to  be  entitled  to  the thing deposited, may deposit the same with a third person  Art. 1969. A contract of deposit may be entered into orally or in writing. (n)  Art. 1970. If a person having capacity to contract accepts a deposit made by one who is incapacitated, the former shall be subject to all the obligations of a depositary, and may be compelled   to   return   the   thing   by   the   guardian,   or administrator,  of  the  person  who  made  the  deposit,  or  by the latter himself if he should acquire capacity. (1764)  

WHERE  DEPOSITARY  CAPACITATED  AND  THE  DEPOSITOR INCAPACITATED

     If  the  depositary  is  capacitated,  he  is  subject  to  all  the obligations of a depositary, whether or not the depositor is capacitated      In the latter case, the depositary must return the property to  the  legal  representative  of  the  incapacitated  or  the depositor himself if he should acquire capacity  WHAT  IF  THE  CAPACITATED  DEPOSITOR  CANNOT  RETURN IT TO THE LEGAL REPRESENTATIVE?  He can be held liable for estafa.WHAT  CAN  HE  OPT  TO  DO?    Consignation  is  not advisable.  It is too costly.  Art.  1971.  If  the  deposit  has  been  made  by  a  capacitated person  with  another  who  is  not,  the  depositor  shall  only have an action to recover the thing deposited while it is still in the possession of the depositary, or to compel the latter to pay  him the amount  by which  he  may have enriched  or benefited himself with the thing  or its price. However, if a third person who acquired the thing acted in bad faith, the depositor may bring an action against him for its recovery. (1765a)  

WHERE DEPOSITARY INCAPACITATED AND THE DEPOSITOR CAPACITATED

     The incapacitated depositary doesn’t incur the obligation of the depositary      However, he is liable to return  o     To  return  the  thing  deposited  while  still  in  his possession o     To the  pay the depositor the  amount by  which  he may  have  benefited  himself  with  the  thing  or  its price  subject  to  the  right  of  a  third  person  who acquired the thing in good faith  WHAT IS THE BENEFIT CONTEMPLATED BY LAW?  Reasonable and judicious use  

OBLIGATIONS OF THE DEPOSITARY   Art. 1972. The depositary is obliged to keep the thing safely and to return it, when  required, to the depositor,  or to his heirs and successors, or to the person who may have been designated in the contract. His responsibility, with regard to the safekeeping and the loss of the thing, shall be governed by the provisions of Title I of this Book.  If  the  deposit  is  gratuitous,  this  fact  shall  be  taken  into account   in   determining   the   degree   of   care   that   the depositary must observe. (1766a)  

OBLIGATION TO KEEP THE THING DEPOSITED AND RETURN IT 

13

Page 14: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   Degree  of  care—ordinarily,  the  depositor  must  exercise over  the  thing  deposited  the  same  diligence  as  he  would exercise over his property a.    Because  it  is  an  essential  requisite  of  the  judicial relation  which  involves  the  depositor’s  confidence in good faith and trustworthiness b.   Presumption  that  the  depositor  in  choosing  the depositary  took  into  account  the  diligence  which the  depositary  is  accustomed  with  respect  to  his own property  2.   Rules applicable  a.    Art. 1163. Every person obliged to give something is  also  obliged  to  take  care  of  it  with  the  proper diligence  of  a  good  father  of  a  family,  unless  the law  or  the  stipulation  of  the  parties  requires another standard of care. (1094a)  b.   Art.  1170.  Those  who  in  the  performance  of  their obligations  are  guilty  of  fraud,  negligence,  or delay,  and  those  who  in  any  manner  contravene the tenor thereof, are liable for damages. (1101)  c.    Art.  1265.  Whenever  the  thing  is  lost  in  the possession of the debtor, it shall be presumed that the loss was due to his fault, unless there is proof to  the  contrary,  and  without  prejudice  to  the provisions  of  article  1165.  This  presumption  does not  apply  in  case  of  earthquake,  flood,  storm,  or other natural calamity. (1183a)  d.   The  required  degree  of  care  is  greater  if  the deposit  is  made  for  compensation  than  when  it  is gratuitous.   3.   Return before specified term—the thing deposited must be returned  to  the  depositor  whenever  he  claims  it,  even though  a  specified  term  or  time  for  such  may  have  been stipulated in the contract.  CAN  THERE  BE  A  STIPULATION  FOR  A  LESSER  DEGREE  OF CARE?  Yes.  CAN THERE BE STIPULATION THAT THERE WOULD ONLY BE LIABILITY  WITH  REGARD  GROSS  NEGLIGENCE  AND  NOT ORDINARY NEGLIGENCE?  Yes.    Art. 1973. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the depositary cannot  deposit the thing  with a third person. If deposit  with  a  third  person  is  allowed,  the  depositary  is liable  for  the  loss  if  he  deposited  the  thing  with  a  person who  is  manifestly  careless  or  unfit.  The  depositary  is responsible for the negligence of his employees. (n)  

OBLIGATION NOT TO TRANSFER DEPOSIT

1.   Liability for loss a.    If  he  deposits  it  with  a  third  person  without authority  even  if  there  has  been  no  negligence from his part and on the third person b.   If  deposit  with  a  third  person  is  allowed,  he  is liable  still  if  he  deposited  the  thing  with  a  person who is manifestly careless or unfit 2.   Exemption from liability a.    The depositor is not responsible in case the thing is lost  without  negligence  of  the  third  person  with whom he  was allowed to deposit the thing if such person is not manifestly careless or unfit 

Art.  1974.  The  depositary  may  change  the  way  of  the deposit  if  under  the  circumstances  he  may  reasonably  presume that the depositor would consent to the change if he knew  of the facts of the  situation.  However, before the depositary  may  make  such  change,  he  shall  notify  the depositor  thereof  and  wait  for  his  decision,  unless  delay would cause danger. (n)  Art.   1975.   The   depositary   holding   certificates,   bonds, securities or instruments which earn interest shall be bound to collect the latter when it becomes due, and to take such steps as may be necessary in order that the securities may preserve  their  value  and  the  rights  corresponding  to  them according to law.  The above provision shall not apply to contracts for the rent of safety deposit boxes. (n)  

14

Page 15: SUMMARY - Salescredit

IF  THE  THING  DEPOSITED  SHOULD  EARN  INTEREST,  THE DEPOSITARY IS UNDER THE OBLIGATION 

1.   To collect the interest as it becomes due  2.   To  take  steps  as  may  be  necessary  to  preserve  its  value and the rights corresponding to it

SAFETY DEPOSIT BOXES 

     The  contract  for  rent  of  safety  deposit  boxes  is  not  an ordinary  contract  of  lease  of  things  because  the  full  and absolute possession  and  control  of the safety deposit box is not given to the party renting.        It is actually a special kind of deposit.  It is a contractual relation  between  the  parties.    The  liability  rules  are governed  by  the  Civil  Code  provisions  on  obligations  and contracts, and not on donations.   

IS  A  STIPULATION  WHICH  EXEMPTS  THE   BANK  FROM LIABILITY  FOR  THE  THINGS  CONTAINED  IN  THE  SAFETY DEPOSIT BOX VALID? 

     The  stipulation  is  void.    Even  if  as  a  rule,  the  Bank  may limit   its   liability   to   some   extent   by   agreement   or stipulation,  the  agreement  or  stipulation  must  not  be contrary to law and public policy.       The law on deposit provides that the depositary is liable for loss  due  to  fraud,  negligence,  delay,  or  contravention  of the  tenor  of  the  agreement.    Any  contrary  stipulation would be void.    Art. 1976. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the depositary  may  commingle  grain  or  other  articles  of  the same kind and quality, in which case the various depositors shall own or have a proportionate interest in the mass. (n)   Art.  1977.  The  depositary  cannot  make  use  of  the  thing deposited without the express permission of the depositor.  Otherwise, he shall be liable for damages.  However,  when  the  preservation  of  the  thing  deposited requires its use, it must be used but only for that purpose. (1767a)  

GENERALLY  THE  DEPOSITARY  CANNOT  MAKE  USE  OF  THE THING DEPOSITED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF THE DEPOSITOR.  WHAT ARE THE EXCEPTIONS?

1.   When  the  depositor  has  given  his  express  permission  to the depositary to use the thing deposited 2.   When  the  preservation  of  the  thing  deposited  requires  its use, it must be used but only for that purpose  

WHAT IS THE REASON FOR THIS RULE?

     The principal purpose of deposit is safekeeping, not use of the thing.  If the purpose is use, it is not deposit anymore.       If   the   depositary   uses   the   thing   deposited   without permission of the depositor, he shall be liable for damages.  In  addition,  if  the  thing  is  lost  even  through  fortuitous event, the depositary shall bear the loss.   Art.  1978.  When  the  depositary  has  permission  to  use  the thing deposited, the contract loses the concept of a deposit and   becomes   a   loan   or   commodatum,   except   where safekeeping is still the principal purpose of the contract.  

15

Page 16: SUMMARY - Salescredit

The  permission  shall  not  be  presumed,  and  its  existence must be proved. (1768a)  

WHAT HAPPENS IF THE DEPOSITARY IS GIVEN PERMISSION TO USE?  

1.   If the purpose of the contract is still for safekeeping, then it retains its concept as a deposit 2.   If the purpose  has become for the use  or consumption of the thing a.    Commodatum—if   the   purpose   is   for   a   non-consumable thing b.   Mutuum—if the purpose is for a  consumable thing or money  Art.  1979. The depositary is liable for the loss  of the thing through a fortuitous event:        (1) If it is so stipulated;        (2)   If   he   uses   the   thing   without   the   depositor's permission;        (3) If he delays its return;        (4) If he allows others to use it, even though he himself may have been authorized to use the same.(n)  

WHEN  IS  THE  DEPOSITARY  LIABLE  FOR  THE  LOSS  OF  THE THING THROUGH A FORTUITOUS EVENT?

1.   If it is so stipulated; 2.   If he uses the thing without the depositor's permission; 3.   If he delays its return; 4.   If he allows others to use it, even though he himself may have been authorized to use the same. (n)  Art. 1980. Fixed, savings, and current deposits of money in banks  and  similar  institutions  shall  be  governed  by  the provisions concerning simple loan. (n)  Art. 1981. When the thing deposited is delivered closed and sealed, the depositary must return it in the same condition, and he shall be liable for damages should the seal or lock be broken through his fault.  Fault  on  the  part  of  the  depositary  is  presumed,  unless there is proof to the contrary.  As regards the value of the thing deposited, the statement of  the  depositor  shall  be  accepted,  when  the  forcible opening is imputable to the depositary, should there be no proof  to  the  contrary.  However,  the  courts  may  pass  upon the  credibility  of  the  depositor  with  respect  to  the  value claimed by him.  When  the  seal  or  lock  is  broken,  with  or  without  the depositary's  fault,  he  shall  keep  the  secret  of  the  deposit. (1769a)  Art. 1982. When it becomes necessary to open a locked box or  receptacle, the depositary is presumed authorized to do so,  if  the  key  has  been  delivered  to  him;  or  when  the instructions of the depositor as regards the deposit cannot be executed without opening the box or receptacle. (n)  Art. 1983. The thing deposited shall be returned with all its products, accessories and accessions.  Should the deposit consist of money, the provisions relative to agents in article 1896 shall be applied to the depositary. (1770)  

16

Page 17: SUMMARY - Salescredit

OBLIGATION  TO  RETURN  PRODUCTS,  ACCESSORIES,  AND ACCESSIONS

     The  depositor  is  the  owner  of  or  at  least  represents  the owner of the things deposited      The  depositary  must  therefore  return  not  only  the  thing itself  but  also  all  its  products,  accessions  and  accessories which are a consequence of ownership  

OBLIGATION  TO  PAY  INTEREST  ON  SUMS  CONVERTED  TO PERSONAL USE

     If  what  has  been  deposited  is  money,  the  depositary  has no right to make use thereof and therefore, he is not liable to pay interest      If  the  depositary  be  in  delay  or  has  used  the  money without  permission,  he  shall  be  liable  for  interest  as indemnity      The depositary  owes interest  on the  sums he  has  applied to his own use from the day on which he did so, and those which he still owes after the extinguishment of the deposit  Art. 1984. The depositary cannot demand that the depositor prove his ownership of the thing deposited.  Nevertheless,  should  he  discover  that  the  thing  has  been stolen and who its true owner is, he must advise the latter of the deposit. If the owner, in spite of such information, does not claim it within  the  period  of  one  month,  the  depositary  shall  be relieved   of   all   responsibility   by   returning   the   thing deposited to the depositor.  If the depositary has reasonable grounds to believe that the thing  has  not  been  lawfully  acquired  by  the  depositor,  the former may return the same. (1771a)  

DEPOSITOR NEED NOT PROVE OWNERSHIP

     The  depositary  who  receives  the  thing  in  deposit  cannot require  that  the  depositor  prove  his  ownership  over  the thing  

WHERE THIRD PERSON APPEARS TO BE THE OWNER

     Should he discover that the thing has been stolen and who its true owner is, he must advise the latter of the deposit      If the owner, in spite of such information, does not claim it within  the  period  of  one  month,  the  depositary  shall  be relieved   of   all   responsibility   by   returning   the   thing deposited to the depositor      If  the  depositary  has  reasonable  grounds  to  believe  that the thing has not been lawfully acquired by the depositor, the former may return the same.  

CAN THE DEPOSITARY REQUIRE THE PRESENTATION OF AN ID?   

Yes.    Proof  of  identification  is  different  from  proof  of ownership.  

CAN  THE  DEPOSITARY  REQUIRE  THE  PRESENTATION  OF THE RECEIPT?

Yes.    It  is  only  a  proof  of  identification  and  not ownership.  

IN DEPOSIT, WHAT SHOULD BE ASCERTAINED AT THE VERY LEAST?  

17

Page 18: SUMMARY - Salescredit

Authority to  make deposit  should  be  ascertained.  Take note that before the deposit, proof of ownership may be required.  The  prohibition  applies  subsequent  to  the  deposit.    There  is required due diligence review.  Art.  1985. When there are two  or  more depositors, if they are not solidary, and the thing admits of division, each one cannot demand more than his share.  When  there  is  solidarity  or  the  thing  does  not  admit  of division,  the  provisions  of  Articles  1212  and  1214  shall govern.  However,  if  there  is  a  stipulation  that  the  thing should be returned to one of the depositors, the depositary shall return it only to the person designated. (1772a)  

RIGHT OF TWO OR MORE DEPOSITORS

1.   Thing deposited divisible and depositors not solidary—if the thing  deposited  is  divisible  and  there  are  two  or  more depositors  who  are  not  solidary,  each  one  can  demand only his proportionate share thereto

2.   Obligation  solidary  or  thing  deposited  not  divisible—if  the obligation is solidary or the thing is not divisible, the rules on active solidarity shall apply, to the effect that each one of the solidary depositors may do whatever may be useful to the others but not anything which may be prejudicial to the latter, and the depositary may return the thing to any one  of  the  solidary  depositors  unless  a  demand  for  its return  has  been  made  by  one  of  them  in  which  case delivery should be made  to him 3.   Return to one of depositors stipulated—if by stipulation the thing  should  be  returned  to  one  of  the  depositors,  the depositary  is  bound  to  return  it  only  to  the  person designated although  he  has not made any demand  for its return.  Art.  1986.  If  the  depositor  should  lose  his  capacity  to contract after having made the deposit, the thing cannot be returned   except   to   the   persons   who   may   have   the administration of his property and rights. (1773)  

PERSON TO WHOM RETURN MUST BE MADE

1.   The  depositary  is  obliged  to  return  the  thing  deposited when   required,   to   the   depositor,   to   his   heirs   and  successors,   or   to   the   person   who   may   have   been designated in the contract 2.   If the person was incapacitated at the time of making the deposit, the property must be returned to his guardian or administrator  or  the  person  who  made  the  deposit  or  to the depositor himself should he acquire capacity 3.   Even  if  the  depositor  had  capacity  at  the  time  of  making the  deposit  but  he subsequently  loses  his  capacity  during the  deposit,  the  thing  must  be  returned  to  his  legal representative  Art. 1987. If at the time the deposit was made a place was designated for the return of the thing, the depositary must take the thing deposited to such place; but the expenses for transportation shall be borne by the depositor.  If  no  place  has  been  designated  for  the  return,  it  shall  be made  where  the  thing  deposited  may  be,  even  if  it  should not  be  the  same  place  where  the  deposit  was  made, provided  that  there  was  no  malice  on  the  part  of  the depositary. (1774)  

PLACE OF RETURN

     The  thing  must  be  returned  at  the  place  agreed  upon  by the parties, and in the absence of stipulation, at the place where the thing deposited might even if it shouldn’t be the same place where the original deposit was made provided the transfer was  accomplished  without malice  on the part of the depositary

18

Page 19: SUMMARY - Salescredit

     In the first place, the expenses for transportation shall be borne by the depositor.  This is just because the deposit is constituted  for  the  benefit  of  the  depositor  and  not  the depositary  who  assumes  no  more  than  the  safekeeping and the return of the thing  Art.  1988.  The  thing  deposited  must  be  returned  to  the depositor upon  demand, even though a specified period  or time for such return may have been fixed.  This  provision  shall  not  apply  when  the  thing  is  judicially attached while in the depositary's possession, or should he have been notified of the opposition of a third person to the return  or  the  removal  of  the  thing  deposited.  In  these cases,   the   depositary   must   immediately   inform   the depositor of the attachment or opposition. (1775)  

TIME OF RETURN

     As a rule, the depositor can demand the return of the thing deposited  at  will  and  this  is  true  whether  the  period  has been stipulated or not      If  the  deposit  is  for  compensation,  the  depositary  is entitled to the compensation for the whole period.  In this case, the period is for both the depositor and depositary.  

WHEN  DEPOSITARY  IS  NOT  OBLIGED  TO  RETURN  THING DEPOSITED

1.   When  the  thing  has  been  judicially  attached  while  in  the depositary’s   possession—he   would   be   disobeying   the judicial order of attachment 2.   When  he  has  been  notified  of  the  opposition  of  a  third person to the return or removal of the thing deposited  Art.    1989.    Unless    the    deposit    is    for    a    valuable consideration,  the  depositary  who  may  have  justifiable reasons  for  not  keeping  the  thing  deposited  may,  even before the time designated, return it to the depositor; and if the  latter  should  refuse  to  receive  it,  the  depositary  may secure its consignation from the court. (1776a)  

RIGHT OF DEPOSITARY TO RETURN THING DEPOSITED

1.   Deposit gratuitous—the depositary may likewise return the thing  deposited  notwithstanding  that  a  period  has  been fixed for the thing if a.    The deposit is gratuitous b.   Justifiable reasons 2.   Deposit for a valuable consideration—if the deposit is for a valuable  consideration,  the  depositary  has  no  right  to return the thing deposited before the expiration of the time designated  even  if  he  should  suffer  inconvenience  as  a consequence  Art. 1990. If the depositary by force majeure or government order loses the thing and  receives money  or another thing in  its  place,  he  shall  deliver  the  sum  or  other  thing  to  the depositor. (1777a)  

LIABILITY FOR LOSS BY FORCE MAJEURE OR GOVERNMENT ORDER

     The  depositary  has  the  obligation  to  return  the  thing deposited      But he isn’t liable for loss of the thing by force majeure or by government order      However,  if  in  place  of  the  thing  he  receives  money  or another thing, he has the duty to deliver to the depositor what  he  has  acquired  otherwise,  he  would  enrich  himself at the expense of the depositor  Art. 1991. The depositor's heir who in good faith may have sold the thing  which  he did  not know  was

19

Page 20: SUMMARY - Salescredit

deposited, shall only be bound to return the price he may have received or to  assign  his  right  of  action  against  the  buyer  in  case  the price has not been paid him. (1778)  

ALIENATION IN GOOD FAITH BY DEPOSITARY’S HEIR

     This   above   article   envisions   a   situation   where   the depositary dies and the object of the deposit is left with his heir who, in good faith, sells it      The  obligation  of  the  heir  is  limited  to  the  return  of  the price received or to assign the right to collect the same if it hasn’t been paid and not the real value of the thing      The rule is based on considerations of equity      If the purchaser who acquired the thing acted in bad faith, the  depositor  may  bring  an  action  against  him  for  its recovery      If the heir acts in bad faith, he is liable for damages.  The sale or appropriation of the thing constitutes estafa.  

OBLIGATIONS OF THE DEPOSITOR   Art.  1992.  If  the  deposit  is  gratuitous,  the  depositor  is obliged  to  reimburse  the  depositary  for  the  expenses  he may   have   incurred   for   the   preservation   of   the   thing deposited. (1779a)  OBLIGATION TO PAY EXPENSES OF PRESERVATION

1.   Deposit  gratuitous—the  above  article  applies  only  if  the deposit  is  gratuitous.    It  rests  on  equity.    The  depositor would have incurred just the same had the thing remained with him.  Without the duty of reimbursement imposed by the article, the depositor would be enriching himself at the expense  of  the  depositary.    The  rule  is  different  in commodatum. 2.   Deposit  for  compensation—if  the  deposit  is  for  valuable consideration,  the  expenses  of  preservation  are  borne  by the  depositary  because  they  are  deemed  included  in  the compensation. There   can   however   be   a   contrary stipulation.    Art. 1993. The depositor shall reimburse the depositary for any loss arising from the character  of the thing deposited, unless  at  the  time  of  the  constitution  of  the  deposit  the former was not aware of, or was not expected to know the dangerous character of the thing, or unless he notified the depositary  of  the  same,  or  the  latter  was  aware  of  it without advice from the depositor. (n)  Art.  1994.  The  depositary  may  retain  the  thing  in  pledge until the full payment of what may be due him by reason of the deposit. (1780)  

DEPOSITARY’S RIGHT OF RETENTION       Talks about legal pledge      The thing retained serves as security for payment of what may be due to the depositary by reason of the deposit      Depositary may foreclose through public auction  Art. 1995. A deposit its extinguished:        (1) Upon the loss or destruction of the thing deposited;        (2)  In  case  of  a  gratuitous  deposit,  upon  the  death  of either the depositor or the depositary. (n)

 

CAUSES OF EXTINGUISHMENT OF DEPOSIT

20

Page 21: SUMMARY - Salescredit

     The causes mentioned are not exclusive      There  could  also  be  other  causes  such  as  return  of  the thing,  Novation,  merger,  expiration  of  term,  fulfillment  of resolutory condition  

EFFECT OF DEATH OF DEPOSITOR OR DEPOSITARY

1.   Deposit  gratuitous—if  the  deposit  is  gratuitous,  the  death of  either  the  depositor  or  depositary  extinguishes  the deposit.   2.   Deposit  for  compensation—a  deposit  for  a  compensation isn’t  extinguished  by  the  death  of  either  party  because unlike  a  gratuitous  deposit,  an  onerous  deposit  isn’t personal  in  nature.    Hence,  the  rights  and  obligations arising  therefrom  are  transmissible  to  their  respective heirs.    But  the  heirs  of  either  party  have  a  right  to terminate  the  deposit  even  before  the  expiration  of  the term.

NECESSARY DEPOSIT   Art. 1996. A deposit is necessary:        (1)   When   it   is   made   in   compliance   with   a   legal obligation;        (2) When it takes place on the occasion of any calamity, such  as  fire,  storm,  flood,  pillage,  shipwreck,  or  other similar events. (1781a)  Art. 1997. The deposit referred to in No. 1 of the preceding article  shall  be  governed  by  the  provisions  of  the  law establishing it, and in case of its deficiency, by the rules on voluntary deposit.  The deposit mentioned in No. 2 of the preceding article shall be regulated by the provisions concerning voluntary deposit and by Article 2168. (1782)  WHEN DEPOSIT IS NECESSARY 1.   When it is made in compliance with a legal obligation 2.   When it takes place on the occasion of any calamity, such as  fire,  storm,  flood,  pillage,  shipwreck,  or  other  similar events 3.   Travelers in hotels or inns 4.   Made by passengers with common carriers  NECESSARY   DEPOSIT   IN   COMPLIANCE   WITH   A   LEGAL OBLIGATION 1.   The  judicial  deposit  of  a  thing  the  possession  of  which  is being disputed in a litigation by two or more persons 2.   The  deposit  with  a  bank  or  public  institution  of  public bonds or instruments  of credit payable to order or  bearer given  in  usufruct  when  the  usufructuary  doesn’t  give proper security for their conservation 3.   The deposit of a thing pledged when the creditor uses the same  without  the  authority  of  the  owner  or  misuses  it  in any other way 4.   Those  required  in  suits  as  provided  for  in  the  Rules  of Court 5.   Those   constituted   to   guarantee   contracts   with   the government.  In this last case, the deposit arises from an obligation of a public or administrative character.    Art.  1998.  The  deposit  of  effects  made  by  the  travelers  in hotels  or  inns  shall  also  be  regarded  as  necessary.  The keepers  of  hotels  or  inns  shall  be  responsible  for  them  as depositaries, provided that notice was given to them, or to their  employees,  of  the  effects  brought  by  the  guests  and that,  on  the  part  of  the  latter,  they  take  the  precautions which   said   hotel-keepers   or   their   substitutes   advised relative to the care and vigilance of their effects. (1783)  Art.  1999.  The  hotel-keeper  is  liable  for  the  vehicles, animals and articles which have been

21

Page 22: SUMMARY - Salescredit

introduced or placed in the annexes of the hotel. (n)   DEPOSIT BY TRAVELLERS IN HOTELS AND INNS 1.   They  have  been  previously  informed  about  the  effects brought by their guests 2.   The latter have taken the precautions prescribed regarding their safekeeping   EXTENT OF LIABILITY OF KEEPERS OF HOTELS AND INNS      The liability isn’t limited to effects lost  or damaged in the hotel  rooms  which  come  under  the  term  “baggage”  or articles such as clothing as are ordinarily used by travelers but include those lost or damaged in hotel annexes such as vehicles in the hotel’s garage      The responsibility extends to all those who offer lodging for a compensation, whatever may be their character  DEFINITION OF TERMS1.   Travelers  or  guests—it  refers  to  transients  and  not  to boarders.    Non-transients  are  governed  by  the  rules  on lease. 2.   Hotel-keeper and inn-keeper— a.    Hotel—a  house  or  large  building  that  supplies rooms  and  food  for  pay  to  travelers  and  others; inn. b.   Inn—a  place  where  travelers  and  others  can  get meals and a room to sleep in. Hotels have largely taken the place of the old inns. c.    Motel—a  roadside  hotel  or  group  of  furnished cottages  or  cabins  providing  overnight  lodging  for motorists; motor court.  Art.   2000.   The   responsibility   referred   to   in   the   two preceding articles shall include the loss of, or injury to the personal  property  of  the  guests  caused  by  the  servants  or employees  of  the  keepers  of  hotels  or  inns  as  well  as strangers;  but  not  that  which  may  proceed  from  any  force majeure. The fact that travelers are constrained to  rely on the  vigilance  of  the  keeper  of  the  hotels  or  inns  shall  be considered  in  determining  the  degree  of  care  required  of him. (1784a)  Art. 2001. The act of a thief or robber, who has entered the hotel  is  not  deemed  force  majeure,  unless  it  is  done  with the use of arms or through an irresistible force. (n)  Art. 2002. The hotel-keeper is not liable for compensation if the loss is due to the acts of the guest, his family, servants or  visitors,  or  if  the  loss  arises  from  the  character  of  the things brought into the hotel. (n)   WHEN HOTEL-KEEPER LIABLE 1.   The loss or injury is caused by  his servants  or employees as  well  as  by  strangers  provided  that  notice  has  been given and proper precautions taken 2.   The  loss  is  caused  by  the  act  of  the  thief  or  robber  done without  the  use  of  arms  and  irresistible  force  for  in  this case, the hotel-keeper is apparently negligent.  WHEN HOTEL-KEEPER IS NOT LIABLE 1.   The  loss  or  injury  is  caused  by  force  majeure,  theft  or robbery  by  a stranger  with the  use  of  arms  or irresistible force, unless he is guilty of fault or negligence in failing to provide against the loss or injury from his cause 2.   The  loss  is  due  to  the  acts  of  the  guests,  his  family, servants, or visitors  3.   The  loss  arises  from  the  character  of  the  things  brought into the hotel  Art.   2003.   The   hotel-keeper   cannot   free   himself   from responsibility by posting notices to the effect that he is not liable for the articles brought by the guest. Any stipulation between  the  hotel-keeper  and  the  guest   whereby  the responsibility of the former as set forth in

22

Page 23: SUMMARY - Salescredit

articles 1998 to 2001 is suppressed or diminished shall be void. (n)  EXEMPTION OR DIMUNITION OF LIABILITY      The  rule  in  this  article  is  similar  to  the  rule  on  common carriers which doesn’t allow a common carrier to dispense with  or limit his responsibility by stipulation or by posting of notices      Such  stipulations  is  deemed  contrary  to  law,  morals,  and public policy 1.   Hotel-keepers     and    inn-keepers    in    offering    their accommodations  to  the  public,  practically  volunteer  as depositaries,  and  as  such,  they  should  be  subject  to  an extraordinary  degree  of  responsibility  for  the  protection and safety of travelers who have no alternative but rely on good faith and care of those with whom they take lodging 2.   Inn-keepers   by   the   nature   of   their   business,   have supervision  and  control  of  their  inns  and  the  premises thereof.  As  a matter of fact, authorities are to the effect that  it  is  not  necessary  in  order  to  hold  an  inn-keeper liable that the effects of the guests be actually delivered to him or his employee, it is enough that they are within the inn.  CAN  THERE  BE  STIPULATION  EXEMPTING  LIABILITY  FOR GROSS  NEGLIGENCE?    No  since  you  cannot  waive  liability  for gross  negligence  as  this  would  be  tantamount  to  waiving  liability for fraud.  Art. 2004. The hotel-keeper has a right to retain the things brought into the hotel by the guest, as a security for credits on  account  of  lodging,  and  supplies  usually  furnished  to hotel guests. (n)  HOTEL-KEEPER’S RIGHT TO RETAIN      Nature of a pledge created by operation of law      Incidentally, the act of obtaining food or accommodation in a hotel or inn without paying thereof constitutes estafa. 

CLASSIFICATION AND PREFERENCE OF CREDITORS

ORDER OF DISTRIBUTION

1.   Equitable claims under Section 482.   Preferred claims with respect to specific movable property and specific immovable property 3.   Preferred  claims  as  to  the  encumbered  property  of  the debtor  which  shall  be  paid  in  the  order  named  in  Article 2244 CC4.   Common  or  ordinary  credits  which  shall  be  paid  pro  rata regardless of the dates under Article 2245 CC5.   With respect to specific movable and immovable property, the taxes due the State shall first be established

EQUITABLE CLAIMS UNDER THE INSOLVENCY LAW

1. Paraphernal property belonging to the wife of the insolvent2.   Property  held  by the insolvent  on deposit,  administration, lease or usufruct3.   Merchandise held by the debtor on commodatum4.   Negotiable instruments for collection or remittance5.   Money held by the debtor for remittance6.   Amounts  due  the  insolvent  for  sales  or  merchandise  on commission7.   Merchandise  bought  by  the  insolvent  on  credit  where  no delivery  is  made  or  where  the  right  of  ownership  or possession has been retained by the seller8.   Goods or chattels wrongfully taken by the insolvent or the amount of the value thereof

CLASSIFICATION AND PREFERENCE OF CREDITORS

23

Page 24: SUMMARY - Salescredit

SECTION 48.    Property not belonging to insolvent; Dowry; Paraphernalia  property.  —  Merchandise,  effects,  and  any other  kind  of  property  found  among  the  property  of  the insolvent, the ownership of which has not been conveyed to him  by a legal and irrevocable title,  shall be considered to be the property of other persons and shall be placed at the disposal of its lawful owners on order of the court made at the  hearing  mentioned  in  section  forty-three  or  at  any ordinary  hearing,  if  the  assignee  or  any  creditor  whose right  in  the  estate  of  the  insolvent  has  been  established shall petition in writing for such hearing and the court in its discretion  shall  so  order,  the  creditors,  however,  retaining such rights in said property as belong to the insolvent, and ubrogating him whenever they shall have complied with all obligations concerning said property.

The following shall be included in this section:

1.    Dowry property inestimado and such property estimado which may remain in the possession of the husband where the  receipt  thereof  is  a  matter  of  record  in  a  public instrument  registered  under  the  provisions  of  sections twenty-one  and  twenty-seven  of  the  Code  of  Commerce  in force.

2.      Paraphernal   property   which   the   wife   may   have acquired   by   inheritance,   legacy,   or   donation   whether remaining   in   the   form   in   which   it   was   received   or subrogated  or  invested  in  other  property,  provided  that such investment or subrogation has been registered in the registro mercantile in accordance with the provisions of the sections  of  the  Code  of  Commerce  mentioned  in  the  next preceding paragraph.

3.     Property  and  effects  deposited  with  the  bankrupt,  or administered,  leased,  rented,  or  held  in  usufruct  by  him.

4.     Merchandise  in  the  possession  of  the  bankrupt,  on commission,  for  purchase,  sale,  forwarding,  or  delivery.  

5.      Bills   of   exchange   or   promissory   notes   without endorsement  or  other  expression  transferring  ownership remitted        to        the        insolvent        for        collection  

6.     Money  remitted  to  the  insolvent,  otherwise  than  on current account, and which is in his possession for delivery to a definite person in the name and for the account of the remitter or for the settlement of claims which are to be met at the unsolvent's domicile.

7.    Amounts due the insolvent for sales of merchandise on commission,  and  bills  of  exchange  and  promissory  notes derived  therefrom  in  his  possession,  even  when  the  same are not made payable to the owner of the merchandise sold, provided it is proven that for the obligation to the insolvent is  derived  therefrom  and  that  said  bills  of  exchange  and promissory  notes  were  in  the  possession  of  the  insolvent for account of the  owner  of the  merchandise to be cashed and  remitted,  in  due  time,  to  the  said  owner;  all  of  which shall  be  a  legal  presumption  when  the  amount  involved  in any such sale shall not have been credited on the books of both  the  owner  of  the  merchandise  and  of  the  insolvent.

8.    Merchandise bought on credit by the insolvent so long as the actual delivery thereof has not been made to him at his store or at any other place stipulated for such delivery, and  merchandise the bills  of lading  or shipping receipts  of which have been sent him after the same  has  been loaded by  order  of  the  purchaser  and  for  his  account  and  risk.

In  all  cases  arising  under  this  paragraph  assignees  may retain  the  merchandise  so  purchased  or  claim  it  for  the creditors   by   paying   the   price   thereof   to   the   vendor.

9.     Goods  or  chattels  wrongfully  taken,  converted,  or withheld  by  the  insolvent  if  still  existing  in  his  possession or        the        amount        of        the        value        thereof.

SECTION  49.     Creditors  sharing  pro  rata.  —  All  creditors, except  those  whose  claims  are  mentioned 

24

Page 25: SUMMARY - Salescredit

in  the  next following section, whose debts are duly proved and allowed shall  be  entitled  to  share  in  the  property  and  estate  pro rata, after the property belonging to other persons referred to  in  the  last  in  preceding  section  has  been  deducted therefrom,    without    priority    or    preference    whatever:

Provided, That any debt proved by any person liable as bail, surety, guarantor, or otherwise, for the debtor, shall not be paid  to  the  person  so  proving  the  same  until  satisfactory evidence shall be produced of the payment of such debt by such  person  so  liable,  and  the  share  to  which  such  debt would be entitled may be paid into court, or otherwise held, for  the  benefit  of  the  party  entitled  thereto,  as  the  court may direct.

SECTION 50.    The following are the preferred claims which shall        be        paid        in        the        order        named:

(a)     Necessary  funeral  expenses  of  the  debtor,  or  of  his wife, or children who are under their parental authority and have no property of their own, when approved by the court;

(b)      Debts   due   for   personal   services   rendered   the insolvent  by  employees,  laborers,  or  domestic  servants immediately  preceding  the  commencement  of  proceedings in insolvency;

(c)     Compensation  due  the  laborers  or  their  dependents under  the  provisions  of  Act  Numbered  Thirty-four  hundred and  twenty-eight,  known  as  the  Workmen's  Compensation Act, 22 as amended by Act Numbered Thirty-eight hundred and  twelve,  and  under  the  provisions  of  Act  Numbered Eighteen    hundred    and    seventy-four,    known    as    the Employees' Liability Act 23 and of other laws providing for payment   of   indemnity   for   damages   in   cases   of   labor accidents;

(d)      Legal   expenses,   and   expenses   incurred   in   the administration  of  the  insolvent's  estate  for  the  common interest  of  the  creditors,  when  properly  authorized  and approved by the court;

(e)      Debts,   taxes,   and   assessments   due   the   Insular Government; 24

(f)    Debts, taxes, and assessments due to any province or provinces of the Philippine Islands;

(g)    Debts, taxes, and assessments due to any municipality or       municipalities       of       the       Philippine       Islands;

All other creditors shall be paid pro rata.

INSOLVENCY OF PARTNERSHIPS & CORPORATIONS

WHEN PARTNERSHIP MAY BE DECLARED INSOLVENT

     A  partnership  may  be  adjudged  insolvent  during  the continuation  of  the  partnership   business   or   after  its dissolution but before the final settlement thereof  

WHO MAY PETITION FOR DECLARATION OF INSOLVENCY IN PARTNERSHIP

1.   In case  of voluntary  insolvency—the  petition may be filed by all the partners, or any one of them 2.   In  case  of  involuntary  insolvency—the  petition  is  filed  by one  or  more  of  the  partners  or  three  or  more  of  the creditors of the partnership.   a.    If the petition be filed by less than all the partners of  the  partnership,  those  partners  who  don’t  join the  petition  shall  be  ordered  to  show  cause  why should not be adjudged to be insolvent in the same manner  as  other  creditors  are  required  to  show cause upon a creditor’s petition  

PROPERTIES INCLUDED IN THE INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS

25

Page 26: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   All the properties of the partnership 2.   All the separate property of each of the partners, except a.    Separate properties of limited partners b.   Properties which are exempt by law  

EFFECT OF FILING OF PETITION

1.   When insolvency proceedings have been instituted against or  by  a  partnership,  the  proceedings  are  deemed  to commence against the partners at the same time even if a partner  is  not  ordered  included  in  the  proceedings  until sometime later 2.   Upon order of the court, all the property of the partnership and also all the separate property of each partner, if they are liable, shall be taken 3.   All  creditors of the  partnership and the separate  creditors of each  partner  shall be allowed to prove their respective claims  4.   The  assignee  shall  be  chosen  by  the  creditors  of  the partnership 5.   Pending   insolvency   proceedings   by   or   against   any partnership, no statute of limitations shall run upon a claim of or against the estate of the debtor  

EFFECT   OF   INSOLVENCY   OF   PARTNERSHIP   OR   ANY PARTNER

1.   A  partnership  may  be  declared  insolvent  notwithstanding the solvency of the partners constituting the same  2.   A partnership isn’t necessarily insolvent because one of its members is insolvent 3.   A   partnership   is   automatically   dissolved   upon   the insolvency of one of the partners or of the partnership  

DISTRIBUTION OF PROCEEDS

1.   The  net  proceeds  of  the  partnership  property  shall  be appropriated to the payment of partnership debts 2.   The  net  proceeds  of  the  individual  estate  of  each  partner shall be applied to the payment of his individual debts 3.   Should   any   surplus   remain,   so   much   thereof   as corresponds  to  him  as  his  share  in  the  subsidiary  liability for  partnership  debts  shall  be  added  to  the  partnership assets and be applied to the payment of such debts 4.   Should  any  surplus  remain  of  the  partnership  property, such assets shall be added to the assets  of the individual partners  in  the  proportion  of  their  respective  interests  in the partnership  

WHO MAY PETITION FOR DECLARATION OF INSOLVENCY OF A CORPORATION

1.   In case  of voluntary  insolvency—the  petition may be filed by any officer duly authorized by the vote of the board of directors or trustees at a meeting especially called for that purpose,  or  by  the  assent  in  writing  of  a  majority  of directors, or trustees, as the case may be 2.   In case of involuntary insolvency— a.    First  view—upon  a  creditor’s  petition  made  and presented in the manner provided for in respect to debtors b.   Second view—the petition must be filed by at least 3    creditors    of    the    corporation    under    the circumstances mentioned by law

 

EFFECT WHEN CORPORATION DECLARED INSOLVENT

26

Page 27: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   Property and assets shall be distributed to the creditors 2.   No discharge shall be granted  PARTNERSHIPS & CORPORATIONS - Insolvency LawSECTION  51.     Partnerships.  —  A  partnership,  during  the continuation   of   the   partnership   business,   or   after   its dissolution and before the final settlement thereof, may be adjudged insolvent, either on the petition of the partners or any  one  of  them,  or  on  the  petition  of  three  or  more creditors of the partnership, qualified as provided in section twenty  of this Act, in either  of  which cases the court  shall issue  an  order  in  the  manner  provided  by  this  Act,  upon which  all  the  property  of  the  partnership,  and  also  all  the separate property of each of the partners, if they are liable, shall  be  taken,  excepting  such  parts  thereof  as  may  be exempt by law; and all creditors of the partnership, and the separate  creditors  of  each  partner,  shall  be  allowed  to prove  their  respective  claims;  and  the  assignee  shall  be chosen  by  the  creditors  of  the  partnership,  and  shall  also keep separate accounts of the property of the partnership, and  of  the  separate  estate  of  each  member  thereof.  The expenses   of   the   proceedings   shall   be   paid   from   the partnership  property  and  the  individual  property  of  the partners  in  such  proportions  as  the  court  shall  determine. The  net  proceeds  of  the  partnership  property  shall  be appropriated  to  the  payment  of  the  partnership  debts  and the net proceeds of the individual estate of each partner to the  payment  of  his  individual  debts.  Should  any  surplus remain  of  the  property  of  any  partner  after  paying  his individual   debts,   such   surplus   shall   be   added   to   the partnership  assets  and  be  applied  to  the  payment  of  the partnership  debts.  Should  any  surplus  of  the  partnership property  remain  after  paying  the  partnership  debts,  such surplus  shall  be  added  to  the  assets  of  the  individual partners  in  the  proportion  of  their  respective  interests  in the partnership. Certificate of discharge shall be granted or refused to each partner as the same would or ought to be if the  proceedings  had  been  by  or  against  him  alone  under this Act; and in all other respects the proceedings as to the partners  shall  be  conducted  in  like  manner  as  if  they  had been commenced and prosecuted by or against one person alone.  If  such  partners  reside  in  different  provinces,  the court in which the petition is first filed shall retain exclusive jurisdiction over the case. If the petition to be filed by less than all the partners of a partnership those partners who do not join in the petition shall be ordered to show cause why they,  as  individuals,  and  said  partnership,  should  not  be adjudged  to  be  insolvent,  in  the  same  manner  as  other debtors  are  required  to  show  cause  upon  a  creditor's petition,   as   in   this   Act   provided;   and   no   order   of djudication  shall  be  made  in  said  proceedings  until  after the      hearing      of      said      order      to      show      cause. SECTION   52.      Corporations   and   sociedades   anonimas; Banking.   —   The   provisions   of   this   Act   shall   apply   to corporations   and   sociedades   anonimas,   and   upon   the petition  of  any  officer  of  any  corporation  or  sociedad anonima,  duly  authorized  by  the  vote  of  the  board  of irectors  or trustees, at a  meeting specially called for that purpose,  or  by  the  assent  in  writing  of  a  majority  of  the directors  or  trustees  as  the  case  may  be,  or  upon  a creditor's  petition  made  and  presented  in   the  manner provided in respect to debtors, of the like proceedings shall be  had  and  taken  as  are  provided  in  the  case  of  debtors: Provided, That in case the articles of association or by-laws of  any  corporation  the  or  sociedad  anonima  provide  a method   for   such   proceedings,   such   method   shall   be followed.  All  the  provisions  of  this  Act  which  apply  to  the debtor, or set forth his duties, examination, and liabilities, or prescribe penalties, or relate to fraudulent conveyances, payments, and assignments, apply to each and every officer of  any  corporation  or  sociedad  anonima  in  relation  to  the same  matters  concerning  the  corporation.  Whenever  any corporation  is  declared  insolvent,  its  property  and  assets shall be distributed to the creditors; due at but no discharge shall  be  granted  to  any  corporation.  The  provisions  of  this Act  shall  not  apply  to  corporations  engaged  principally  in the banking business, 26 or to any other corporation as to which there is any special provision of law for its liquidation in case of insolvency.

PROOF OF DEBTS - Insolvency Law

27

Page 28: SUMMARY - Salescredit

DEBTS THAT MAY BE PROVED

1.   All  debts due and  payable from the debtor  at the time  of the adjudication of the insolvency2.   All  debts  existing  at  the  time  of  the  adjudication  of insolvency but not payable  until a  future time, a discount being  made  if  no  interest  is  payable  by  the  terms  of  the contract3.   Any  debt  of  the  insolvent  arising  from  his  liability  as indorser,  surety,  bail  or  guarantor,  where  such  liability became  absolute  after  the  adjudication  of  insolvency  but before the final dividend shall have been declared

4.   Other contingent debts and contingent liabilities contracted by the insolvent if the contingency shall happen before the order of final dividend5.   Any  debt  of  the  insolvent  arising  from  his  liability  to  any person liable as bail, surety, or guarantor or otherwise, for the  insolvent,  who  shall  have  paid  the  debt  in  full,  or  in part

CONTINGENT CLAIM

> Claim in which liability depends on some future event that may  or  may  not  happen  and  which  makes  it  uncertain whether there will be any liability> Such   claim  is   not  barred  merely  because  it   is   not presented  during  the  insolvency  proceedings.    After  the insolvency   proceedings   and   the   happening   of   the contingency,   the   creditor   may   pursue   any   available remedy for the collection of his claim

DEBTS THAT MAY NOT BE PROVED

1.   Claims barred by the statute of limitations2.   Claims  of  secured  creditors  with  a  mortgage  or  pledge  in their favor unless they surrender their security3.   Claims  of  creditors  who  hold  an  attachment  or  execution on  the  property  of  the  debtor  duly  recorded  and  not dissolved

4.   Claims  on  account  of  which  a  fraudulent  preference  was made or given5.   Support, as it doesn’t arise from any business transaction but from the relation of marriage6.   A claim for unliquidated damages arising out of a pure tort which  neither constitutes a breach of an express  contract nor results in any unjust enrichment of the tortfeasor thay may form the basis of an implied contract

CAN A CREDITOR SET UP COMPENSATION/OFFSET HIS OWN DEBTS AGAINST THE INSOLVENT DEBTOR?

> This is the case of Uy-Tong v. Silva.  > Compensation  can  be  set  up  against  the  insolvent  debtor but  only  for  those  debts  which  arose  at  least  30  days before  the  filing  of  the  insolvency  proceedings.    If  the claim  arose  within  the  30-day  period  before  the  filing  of the  petition,  there  can  be  no  compensation.    The  rule  on preferences  would  be  disregarded  if  the  set-off  were allowed.    It  would,  in  effect,  give  the  one  claiming compensation undue preference over other creditors. 

PROOF OF DEBTS - Insolvency Law

SECTION 53.    Class of debts. — All debts due and payable from   the   debtor   at   the   time   of   the   adjudication   of insolvency, and all debts then existing but not payable until a  future  time,  a  discount  being  made  if  no  interest  is payable by the terms of the contract, may be proved against the estate of the debtor.

SECTION 54.    Commercial paper. — If the debtor is bound as indorser, surety, bail, or guarantor, upon any

28

Page 29: SUMMARY - Salescredit

bill, bond, note,  or  other  specialty  or  contract,  or  for  any  debt  any person,  and  his  liability  shall  not  have  become  absolute until after the adjudication  of insolvency, the  creditor  may prove the same after such liability shall have become fixed, and  before  the  final  dividend  shall  have  been  declared.

SECTION   55.      Contingent   debts.   —   In   all   cases   of contingent  debts  and  contingent  liabilities,  contracted  by the  debtor,  and  not  herein  otherwise  provided  for,  thecreditor  may  make  claim  therefor  and  have  his  claim allowed,  with  the  right  to  share  in  the  dividends,  if  the contingency  shall  happen  before  the  order  of  the  final dividend; or he may, at any time, apply to the court to have the  present  value  of  the  debt  or  liability  ascertained  and liquidated, which shall be done in such manner as the court shall  order,  and  it  shall  be  allowed  for  the  amount  so ascertained.

SECTION  56.     Bail,  surety,  etc.,  for  the  debtor.  —  Any person liable as bail, surety, or guarantor, or otherwise, for the  debtor,  who  shall  have  paid  the  debt,  or  any  part thereof, in discharge of the whole, shall be entitled to prove such debt, or to stand in the place of the creditor, if he shall have proved the same, although such payments shall have been   made   after   the   proceedings   in   insolvency   were commenced;  and  any  person  so  liable  for  the  debtor,  and who  has  not  paid  the  whole  of  said  debt,  but  is  still  liable for the same, or any part thereof, may, if the creditor shall fail or omit to prove such debt, prove the same in the name of the creditor.

SECTION 57.    Rents and periodical payments. — Where the debtor is liable to pay rent, or other debt falling due at fixed and   stated   periods,   the   creditor   may   prove,   for   a proportionate part thereof up to the time of the insolvency, as if the same became due from day to day, and not at such fixed and stated periods.

SECTION  58.     Mutual  debts  and  credits.  —  In  all  cases  of mutual  debts  and  mutual  credits  between  the  parties,  the account between them shall be stated, and one debt set off against the other, and the balance only shall be allowed of a claim   in   its   nature   not   provable   against   the   estate: Provided,  That  no  set-off  or  counterclaim  shall  be  allowed in favor of any debtor to the insolvent of a claim purchased by   or   transferred   to   such   debtor   within   thirty   days immediately  preceding  the  filing,  or  after  the  filing  of  the petition by or  against the insolvent.

SECTION  59.     Mortgages,  pledges,  liens,  etc.;  Release  or sale  by  assignee.  —  When  a  creditor  has  a  mortgage,  or pledge of real or personal property  of the debtor, or a lien thereon,  for  securing  the  payment  of  a  debt  owing  to  him from the debtor, or an attachment or execution on property of  the  debt  or  duly  recorded  and  not  dissolved  under  this Act, he shall be admitted as a creditor for the balance of the debt only, after deducting the value of such property, such value to be ascertained by agreement between him and the receiver, if any, and if no receiver, then  upon  such sum as the  court  or  a  judge  thereof  may  decide  to  be  fair  and reasonable, before the election of an assignee, or by a sale thereof,  to  be  made  in  such  manner  as  the  court  or  judge thereof  shall  direct;  or  the  creditor  may  release  or  convey his claim to the receiver, if any, or if no receiver then to thesheriff,  before  the  election   of  an  assignee,  or  to  the assignee   if   an   assignee   has   been   elected,   upon   such property,  and  be  admitted  to  prove  his  whole  debt.  If  the value  of  the  property  exceeds  the  sum  for  which  it  is  so held  as  security,  the  assignee  may  release  to  the  creditor the debtor's right of redemption thereon on receiving such excess; or he may sell the property, subject to the claim of the  creditor  thereon,  and  in  either  case  the  assignee  and creditor,  respectively,  shall  execute  all  deeds  and  writings necessary or proper to consummate the transaction. If the property  is  not  sold  or  released,  and  delivered  up,  or  its value fixed, the creditor shall  not be allowed to prove  any part  of  his  debt,  but  the  assignee  shall  deliver  to  the creditor  all  such  property  upon  which  the  creditor  holds  a mortgage,   pledge,   or   lien,   or   upon   which   he   has   an attachment or execution.

SECTION 60.    Creditors proving claims cannot use; Stay of action.  —  No  creditor,  proving  his  debt  or  claim,  shall  be allowed  to  maintain  any  suit  therefor  against  the  debtor, but shall be deemed to have waived all right of action and suit  against  him,  and  all  proceedings  already  commenced, or any unsatisfied judgment already obtained thereon, shall be deemed to be discharged and surrendered thereby; and after  the  debtor's  discharge,  upon  proper  application  and proof to the court having jurisdiction, all such  proceedings shall   be,   dismissed,   and   such   unsatisfied   judgments satisfied  of  record:  Provided,  That 

29

Page 30: SUMMARY - Salescredit

no  valid  lien  existing  in good faith thereunder shall be thereby affected. A creditor proving his debt or claim shall not be held to  have  waived his  right  of  action  or  suit  against  the  debtor  when  a discharge  has  have  been  refused  or  the  proceedings  have been  determined  to  the  without  a  discharge.  No  creditor whose  debt  is  provable  under  this  Act  shall  be  allowed, after  the  commencement  of  proceedings  in  insolvency,  to prosecute to final judgment any action therefor against the debtor  until  the  question  of  the  debtor's  discharge  shall ave been determined, and any such suit proceeding shall, upon the application of the debtor or of any creditor, or the assignee, be stayed to await the determination of the court on the question of discharge: Provided, That if the amount due the creditor is in dispute, the suit, by leave of the court in  insolvency,  may  proceed  to  judgment  for  purpose  of ascertaining   the   amount   due,   which   amount,   when adjudged,  may  be  allowed  in  the  insolvency  proceedings, but execution shall be stayed aforesaid.

SECTION 61.    Preferences knowingly accepted contrary to this  Act.  —  Any  person  who  shall  have  accepted  any preference,  having  reasonable  cause  to  believe  that  the same  was  made  or  given  by  the  debtor  contrary  to  any provision of this Act, shall not be allowed to prove the debt or  claim  on  account  of  which  the  preference  was  made  or given,  nor  shall  he  receive  any  dividend  thereon,  until  he shall have surrendered to the assignee all property, money, benefit,   or   advantage   received   by   him   under   such preference.

SECTION  62.     Examinations  under  oath  by  court.  —  The court may, upon the application of the assignee,  or of any creditor,   or   without   any   application,   before   or   after adjudication in insolvency, examine upon oath the debtor in relation to his property and his estate and may examine any other  person  tending  or  making  proof  of  claims,  and  may subpoena   witnesses  to  give  evidence   relating  to  such matters.  All  examinations  of  witnesses  shall  be  had  and depositions  shall  be  taken  in  accordance  with  and  in  the same manner as is provided by the Code of Civil Procedure.

DISCHARGE in Insolvency

DISCHARGE

     Formal and judicial release of an insolvent debtor from his debts  with  the  exception  of  those  expressly  reserved  by law  

ACTS  OF  DEBTOR  OR  GROUNDS  WHICH  WILL  PREVENT  A DISCHARGE

1.   False swearing 2.   Concealment of any part of his estate or effects 3.   Fraud or willful neglect in the care of his property or in the delivery thereof to the assignee 4.   Procuring  his  properties  to  be  attached  or  seized  on execution  within  1  month  before  the  commencement  of insolvency proceedings 5.   Destruction,  mutilation,  alteration  or  falsification  of  his books, documents, and papers 6.   Giving fraudulent preference to a creditor 7.   Non-disclosure  to  the  assignee  of  a  proven  false  or fictitious debt within 1 month after acquiring knowledge 8.   Being a merchant, failure to keep proper books of accounts 9.   Influencing the action  of any  creditor, at  any state  of the proceedings, by any pecuniary consideration  10. Effecting   any   transfer,   conveyance,   or   mortgage   in contemplation of insolvency 11. Conviction of any misdemeanor under the Insolvency Law 12. In  case  of  voluntary  insolvency,  he  has  received  the benefits  of  insolvency  within  6  years  next  preceding  his application for discharge 13. If  insolvency  proceedings  in  which  he  could  have  applied for a discharge are pending by or against him in the RTC of any other province or city  

DEBTS RELEASED BY DISCHARGE

30

Page 31: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   All  claims,  debts,  and  liabilities  and  demands  set  forth  in the schedule 2.   All  claims,  debts,  and  liabilities  and  demands  which  were or  might  have  been  proved  against  the  estate  of  the insolvency  

DEBTS NOT RELEASED BY DISCHARGE

1.   Taxes  2.   Debts arising from any act of swindling (because you don’t reward a person who violated a law or a trust) 

3.   Debts of a surety, guarantor, indorser, or any person liable for the same debt, for or with the insolvent debtor (This is because  the  discharge  only  benefits  the  principal  debtor, not his co-debtors or guarantors).  4.   Debts of a corporation  5.   Claims for support  6.   Debts  which  were  not  proved  and  could  not  have  been proved during the insolvency proceedings  7.   Debts arising from tort  8.   Claims of secured creditors  9.   Debts  which  were  not  yet  existing  at  the  time  of  the discharge 10. Contingent claims  

WHEN DISCHARGE MAY BE REVOKED 

1.   Whose debt was proved or provable against the estate in insolvency,   on   the   ground   that   the   discharge   was fraudulently obtained 2.   Who    has   discovered   facts   constituting   the    fraud subsequent to the discharge and provided, 3.   The  petition  is  filed  within  1  year  after  the  date  of  the discharge  DISCHARGE - Act 1956 SECTION 64.    Discharge. — At any time after the expiration of  three  months  from  the  adjudication  of  insolvency,  but not later  than  one year from such adjudication, unless the property  of  the  insolvent  has  not  been  converted  unto money,  the  debtor  may  apply  to  the  court  for  a  discharge from  his  debts, and the court shall thereupon  order notice to be given to all creditors who have proved their debts to appear on a day appointed for that purpose and show cause why a discharge should  not  be granted to the  debtor; said notice shall be given by registered mail and by publication 28  at  least  once  a  week,  for  six  weeks,  in  a  newspaper published in the province  or city, or, if there be none, in a newspaper which, in the opinion of the judge, will best give notice to the creditors of the said insolvent: Provided, That if  no  debts  have  been  proven,  such  notice  shall  not  be required.  SECTION  65.     Invalid  discharge.  —  No  discharge  shall  be granted, or if granted shall be valid, (1) if the debtor shall have  sworn  falsely  in  his  affidavit  annexed  to  his  petition, schedule,  or  inventory,  or  upon  any  examination  in  the course  of  the  proceedings  in  insolvency,  in  relation  to  any material  fact  concerning  his  estate  or  his  debts  or  to  any other  material  fact;  or  (2)  if  he  has  concealed  any  part  of his  estate  or  effects,  or  any  books  or  writing  relating thereto;  or  (3)  if  he  has  been  guilty  of  fraud  or  willful neglect  in  the  care  or  custody  of  his  property  or  in  the delivery to the assignee of the property belonging to him at the  time  of  the  presentation  of  his  petition  and  inventory, excepting such property as he is permitted to retain under the provisions of this Act; or (4) if, within one month before the  commencement  of  such  proceedings,  he  has  procured his real estate, goods, moneys, or chattels to be attached or seized on execution;  or  (5) if he  has destroyed, mutilated, ltered,  or  falsified  any  of  his  books,  documents,  papers, writings,  or  securities,  or  has  made,  or  been  privy  to  the making  of,  any  false  or  fraudulent  entry  in  any  book  of account  or  other  document  with  intent  to  defraud  his creditors; or (6) if he has given any fraudulent preference, contrary  to  the  provisions  of  this  Act,  or  has  made  any fraudulent    payment,    gift,    transfer,    conveyance,    or assignment  of  any  part  of  his  property,  or  has  admitted  a false  or  fictitious  debt 

31

Page 32: SUMMARY - Salescredit

against  his  estate;  or  (7)  if,  having knowledge  that  any  person  has  proven  such  false   or fictitious  debt,   he   has   not   disclosed  the   same  to   his assignee within one month after such knowledge; or (8) if, being  a  merchant  or  tradesman,  he  has  not  kept  proper books of account in Arabic numerals and in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Commerce; or (9) if he, or any other person on his account, or in his behalf, has influenced the action of any creditor, at any stage of the proceedings, by any  pecuniary consideration  or obligation;  or (10) if  he has,  in  contemplation  of  becoming  insolvent,  made  any pledge,  payment,  transfer,  assignment,  or  conveyance  of any part of his property, directly or indirectly, absolutely or conditionally,  for  the  purpose  of  preferring  any  creditor  or person  having  a  claim  against  him,  or  who  is,  or  may  be, under liability for him, or for the purpose of preventing the property from coming into the hands of the assignee, or of being distributed under this Act in satisfaction of his debts; or (11) if he has been convicted of any misdemeanor under this  Act,  or  has  been  guilty  of  fraud  contrary  to  the  true intent  of  this  Act;  or  (12)  in  case  of  voluntary  insolvency, has   received  the  benefit  of  this   or  any  other   Act   of insolvency  or  bankruptcy  within  six  years  next  preceding his   application   for   discharge;   or   (13)   if   insolvency proceedings in which he could have applied for a discharge are pending by or against him in the Court of First Instance of  any  other  province  or  city  in  the  Philippine  Islands. Before any  discharge is granted, the  debtor  shall take and subscribe  an  oath  to  the  effect  that  he  has  not  done, suffered, or been privy to any act, matter, or thing specified in this Act as grounds for withholding such discharge or as invalidating          such          discharge,          if          granted.  SECTION  66.     Any  creditor  opposing  the  discharge  of  a debtor  shall  file  his  objections  thereto,  specifying  the grounds of his opposition, and after the debtor has filed and served his answer thereto which pleadings shall be verified, the  court  shall  try  the  issue  or  issues  raised,  according  to the     practice     provided     by     law     in     civil     actions.  SECTION  67.     Discharge  of  debtor  by  court.  —  If  it  shall appear  to  the  court  that  the  debtor  has  in  all  things conformed to his duty under this Act, and that he is entitled under  the  provisions  thereof  to  receive  a  discharge,  the court shall grant him a discharge from all his debts, except as  hereinafter  provided,  and  shall  give  him  a  certificate thereof, under the seal of the court, in substance as follows: "In  the  Court  of  First  Instance  of  the  _____________, Philippine  Islands.  Whereas,  ______________,  has  been duly adjudged an insolvent under the Insolvency Law of the Philippine Islands, and appears to have conformed to all the requirements  of  law  in  that  behalf,  it  is  therefore  ordered by   the   court   that   said   _______________   be   forever discharged   from   all   debts   and   claims,   which   by   said Insolvency  Law  are  made  provable  against  his  estate,  and which existed on the _______ day of _________, on which the  petition  of  adjudication  was  filed  by  (or  against)  him, excepting such debts, if any, as are by said Insolvency Law excepted  from  the  operation  of  a  discharge  in  insolvency. Given  under my hand, and the seal  of the court, this ____ day  of  ______________,  anno  Domini  ______________ Attest:    ____________,    clerk.    (Seal)    _____________, judge."  SECTION 68.    Debts not released under this Act — No tax or  assessment  due  the  Insular  Government  29  or  any provincial or municipal government, whether proved or not as  provided  for  in  this  Act,  shall  be  discharged.  Nor  shall any  debt  created  by  the  fraud  or  embezzlement  of  the debtor,  or  by  his  defalcation  as  a  public  officer  or  while acting in a fiduciary capacity, be discharged under this Act, but the debt may be proved, and the dividend thereon shall be a payment on account of said debt. No discharge solvent granted  under  this  Act  shall  release,  discharge,  or  affect any person liable for the same debt, for or with the debtor, either  as  partner,  joint  contractor,  indorser,  surety,  or otherwise. 30  SECTION  69.     Effect  of  discharge  under  this  Act  —  A discharge,  duly  granted  under  this  Act,  shall,  with  the exceptions  aforesaid,  release  the  debtor  from  all  claims, debts, liabilities, and demands set forth in his schedule, or which were or might have been proved against his estate in insolvency, and may be pleaded by a simple averment that on  the  day  of  its  date  such  discharge  was  granted  to  him, setting  forth  the  same  in  full,  and  the  same  shall  be  a complete bar to all suits brought on any such debts, claims, liabilities,  or  demands,  and  the  certificate  shall  be  prima facie evidence in favor of such fact and of the

32

Page 33: SUMMARY - Salescredit

regularity of such   discharge:   Provided,   however,   That   any   creditor whose  debt  was  proved  or  provable  against  the  estate  in insolvency  who shall see fit to contest the  validity  of such discharge  on  the  ground  that  it  was  fraudulently  obtained and  who  has  discovered  the  facts  constituting  the  fraud subsequent  to  the  discharge,  may,  at  any  time  within  one year  after  the  date  thereof,  apply  to  the  court  which granted it to set it aside and annul the same.

COMPOSITION - Insolvency Law

What is Composition?

> Agreement made upon a sufficient consideration, between an  insolvent  or  embarrassed  debtor  and  his  creditors, whereby  the  latter,  for  the  sake  of  immediate  or  sooner payment,  agree  to  accept  a  dividend  less  than  the  whole amount  of  their  claims,  to  be  distributed  pro  rata,  indischarge and satisfaction of the whole debt

WHY WOULD A CREDITOR OPT FOR COMPOSITION?

1.   To get the present value of money2.   To reduce costs—costs of assignee and receiver

REQUIREMENTS FOR A VALID OFFER OF COMPOSITION

1.   The offer of the terms of composition must be made after the  filing  in  court  of  the  schedule  of  property  and submission of the list of creditors;  

2.   The  offer  must  be  accepted  in  writing  by  a  DOUBLE MAJORITY OF THE CREDITORS—majority of the number of creditors representing a majority of the claims;

3.   It  must  be  made  after  depositing  the  consideration  to  be paid and the cost of the proceedings;

4.   The  court  must  approve  or  confirm  the  terms  of  the composition.a.    It is for the best interest of the creditorsb.   The debtor hasn’t been guilty of any of the acts, or of  a  failure  to  perform  any  of  the  duties  which would create a bar to his dischargec.    The offer and its acceptance are in good faith and have  not  been  made  or  procured  in  a  mannerforbidden by the Act

EFFECTS OF THE CONFIRMATION OF COMPOSITION

1.   The  consideration  shall  be  distributed  as  the  judge  shall direct2.   The insolvency proceeding shall be dismissed3.   The title to the insolvent’s property shall revest in him4.   The insolvent shall be released from his debts

WHEN CONFIRMATION MAY BE SET ASIDE

1.   That   fraud   was   practiced   in   the   procuring   of   such composition2.   That  the  knowledge  thereof  has  come  to  the  petitioner since the confirmation of such composition

COMPOSITIONS

33

Page 34: SUMMARY - Salescredit

SECTION 63.    When confirmation filed. — An insolvent may offer  terms  of  composition  to  his  creditors  after,  but  not before, he has filed in court a schedule of his property and list  of  his  creditors  as  provided  in  this  Act.  An  application for  the  confirmation  of  a  composition  may  be  filed  in  the insolvency court after, but not before, it has been accepted in  writing  by  a  majority  in  number  of  all  creditors  whose claims have been allowed, which number must represent a majority   in   amount    of   such   claims   and   after   the consideration  to  be  paid  by  the  insolvent  to  his  creditors and  the  money  necessary  to  pay  all  debts  which  have priority  and  the  costs  of  proceedings  have  been  deposited in such place as shall be  designated by and  subject to the order of the court. A time shall be fixed by the court for the hearing  upon  an  application  for  the  confirmation  of  a composition, and for the hearing of such objections as may be  made  to  its  confirmation.  The  court  shall  confirm  a composition if satisfied that (1) it is for the best interest of the creditors; (2) that the insolvent  has  not been guilty  of any of the acts, or of a failure to perform any of the duties, which would create a bar to his discharge; and (3) that the offer  and  its  acceptance  are  in  good  faith,  and  have  not been made or procured except as herein provided, or by any means,   promises,   or   acts   herein   forbidden.   Upon   the confirmation  of  a  composition  the  consideration  shall  be distributed   as   the   judge   shall   direct,   and   the   case dismissed,  and  the  title  to  the  insolvent's  property  shall revest in him. Whenever a composition is not confirmed, the estate   in   insolvency   shall   be   administered   as   herein provided.  The  court  may,  upon  application  of  a  party  in interest,  filed  at  any  time  within  six  months  after  the composition  has  been  confirmed,  set  the  same  aside,  and reinstate the case if it shall be made to appear upon a trial that   fraud   was   practiced   in   the   procuring   of   such composition,  and  that  the  knowledge  thereof  has  come  to the petitioner since the confirmation of such composition.

FRAUDULENT PREFERENCES AND TRANSFERS  Insolvency

TRANSFER

     Includes  the  sale  and  every  other  and  different  modes  of disposing of or parting with property, or the possession of property,   absolutely   or   conditionally,   as   a   payment, pledge, mortgage, gift, or security 

 

WHEN PREFERENTIAL TRANSFER EXISTS

     It  is  a  parting  with  the  property  of  the  insolvent  for  the benefit of a creditor with the result that the estate of the insolvent is diminished and other creditors are prejudiced.   

WHEN FRAUDULENT PREFERENCE EXISTS

It  is  a  disposition  of  property  by  the  debtor  under  the  following conditions:  1.   He is insolvent or is in contemplation of insolvency;  2.   The transaction is made within 30 days before the filing of the petition for insolvency;  3.   It is made with a view to giving preference to any creditor;  4.   The person receiving  a  benefit  has reason to  believe that the  debtor  is  insolvent  and  that  the  transfer  is  made  in order to defeat or prejudice the rights of other creditors.  

WHEN FRAUDULENT TRANSFER EXISTS

     It  is  any  disposition  of  property  made  by  the  insolvent within  one  month  before  the  filing  of  the  petition  for insolvency, except for valuable consideration in good faith.   

EFFECT OF FRAUDULENT TRANSFER

34

Page 35: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   If  made  within  30  days  before  the  filing  of  insolvency proceedings, the transfer is void.  2.   If  made  after  the  filing  of  insolvency  proceedings,  it  is rescissible for being in fraud of creditors.   3.   Another  remedy  of  the  creditors  is  to  file  a  criminal complaint against the insolvent debtor. 

IS THERE A PRESUMPTION OF FRAUD? 

THERE IS A REBUTTABLE PRESUMPTION THAT A CONVEYANCE IS FRAUDULENT WHEN:  1.   It is not made in the usual and ordinary cause of business of the debtor; or  2.   It is made under a confession of judgment.

FRAUDULENT PREFERENCES AND TRANSFERS- Act 1956SECTION   70.      If   any   debtor,   being   insolvent,   or   in contemplation  of  insolvency,  within  thirty  days  before  the filing of a petition by or against him, with a view to giving a preference to any creditor or person having a claim against him or who is under any liability for him, procures any part of  his  property  to  be  attached,  sequestered,  or  seized  on execution,   or   makes   any   payment,   pledge,   mortgage, assignment, transfer, sale, or conveyance of any part of his property,   either   directly   or   indirectly,   absolutely   or conditionally,   to   anyone,   the   person   receiving   such payment,  pledge,  mortgage,  assignment,  transfer,  sale,  or conveyance,   or   to   be   benefited   thereby,   or   by   such attachment  or  seizure,  having  reasonable  cause  to  believe that  such  debtor  is  insolvent,  and  that  such  attachment, sequestration,    seizure,    payment,    pledge,    mortgage, conveyance,  transfer,  sale,  or  assignment  is  made  with  a view to prevent his property from coming to his assignee in insolvency,  or  to  prevent  the  same  from  being  distributed ratably among his creditors, or to defeat the object of, or in any  way  hinder,  impede,  or  delay  the  operation  of  or  to evade  any  of  the  provisions  of  this  Act,  such  attachment, sequestration,    seizure,    payment,    pledge,    mortgage, transfer,  sale,  assignment,  or  conveyance  is  void,  and  the assignee, or the receiver, may recover the property, or the value  thereof,  as  assets  of  such  insolvent  debtor.  If  such payment, pledge,  mortgage, conveyance, sale,  assignment, or transfer is not made in the usual and ordinary course of business  of  the  debtor,  or  if  such  seizure  is  made  under  a judgment  which  the  debtor  has  confessed  or  offered  to allow, that fact shall be prima facie evidence of fraud. Any payment, pledge,  mortgage, conveyance, sale,  assignment, or  transfer of property  of  whatever character  made by the insolvent within one month before the filing of a petition in insolvency   by   or   against   him,   except   for   a   valuable pecuniary  consideration  made  in  good  faith,  shall  be  void. All  assignments,  transfers,  conveyances,   mortgages,   or encumbrances  of  real  estate  shall  be  deemed,  under  this section,  to  have  been  made  at  the  time  the  instrument conveying or affecting such realty was filed for record in the office of the register of deeds of the province or city where the same is situated.

THE INSOLVENCY LAW ACT NO. 1956

 TITLE AND GENERAL SUBJECT OF THE ACT

 SECTION 1.    This Act shall be known and may be cited as The  Insolvency  Law,  and  in  accordance  with  its  provisionsevery   insolvent   debtor   may   be   permitted   to   suspend payments or be discharged from his debts and liabilities.  INSOLVENCY, DEFINED.      Generally  denotes  the  state  of  a  person  whose  liabilities are more than his assets      Relative condition of a man’s assets and liabilities that the former  if  all  made  immediately  available,  wouldn’t  be sufficient to discharge the latter  

INSOLVENCY PRIMARILY GOVERNED BY CIVIL CODE

35

Page 36: SUMMARY - Salescredit

     Insolvency  shall  be  governed  by  special  laws  insofar  as they are not inconsistent with the CC      Special law referred to is the Insolvency Law  

PURPOSES OF THE INSOLVENCY LAW

1.   To  effect   an  equitable  distribution  of  the  bankrupt’s property among his creditors 2.   To benefit the debtor in discharging him from his liabilities and  enabling  him  to  start  afresh  with  the  property  set apart to him as exempt  

WHAT    MAYBE    PERMITTED    OF    A    DEBTOR    BY    THE INSOLVENCY LAW

1.   To petition the court to suspend payments of his debts 2.   To be discharged from his debts and liabilities by voluntary or involuntary proceedings 

SUSPENSION OF PAYMENTS

Insolvency Law      Postponement  by  court  order  of  the  payment  of  debts  of one who, while possessing sufficient property to cover his debts,  foresees  the  impossibility  of  meeting  them  when they respectively fall due  

PURPOSE AND BASIS OF SUSPENSION OF PAYMENTS

1.   The purpose of a suspension of payments is to suspend or delay  the  payment  of  debts  the  amount  of  which  isn’t affected although a postponement is declared 2.   The basis is the probability of the debtor’s inability to meet his obligation  when they respectively fall due,  despite the fact that he has sufficient assets to cover all his liabilities  

STEPS IN SUSPENSION OF PAYMENTS

1.   Filing of petition by the debtor 2.   Issuance  by  the  court  of  an  order  calling  a  meeting  of creditors 3.   Publication of the order and service of summons 4.   Meeting  of  creditors  for  the  consideration  of  the  debtor’s proposition 5.   Approval of the creditor’s of the debtor’s proposition 6.   Objections,  if  any,  to  the  decision  which  must  be  made within 10 days following the meeting 7.   Issuance   of   order   by   the   court   directing   that   the agreement be carried  out in case the decision is declared valid,  or  when  no  objection  to  said  decision  has  been presented  

REQUISITES OF PETITION FOR SUSPENSION OF PAYMENTS THE PETITION TO BE FILED BY A DEBTOR—

1.   Possessing sufficient property to cover all debts 2.   Foreseeing  the  impossibility  of  meeting  them  when  they respectively fall due 3.   Petitioning that  he be declared in the state  of  suspension of payments 4.   The petition need not be verified (Verification is when the debtor would affirm all allegations and statement of facts)

DOCUMENTS TO ACCOMPANY PETITION

36

Page 37: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   A verified schedule containing a full and true statement of the debts and liabilities of the petitioner together with a list of creditors, including the residence, sum due each, nature of liability, consideration thereof, and any existing pledge, lien or security 2.   A  verified  inventory  containing  a  list  of  creditors,  an accurate description of all the property, real and personal, of the petitioner including property exempt from execution and a statement as to the value of each item of property, its location, and encumbrances thereon, if any 3.   A statement of his assets and liabilities 4.   The proposed agreements he requests of his creditors 

EFFECTS OF FILING OF PETITION

1.   No disposition in any manner of his property may be made by  the  petitioner  except  insofar  as  concerns  the  ordinary operations  of  commerce  or  of  industry  in  which  he  is engaged 2.   No payments may be made by the petitioner except in the ordinary course of business or industry 3.   Upon request to the  court,  all  pending executions  against the  debtor  shall  be  suspended  except  execution  against property especially mortgaged  

CREDITORS AFFECTED BY FILING OF PETITION

     Only creditors included in the schedules filed by the debtor shall be cited to appear and to take part in the meeting      Hence  those  who  didn’t  appear  because  they  were  not informed of the proceedings are unaffected by the same   

CREDITORS  NOT  AFFECTED  BY  ORDER  OF  SUSPENSION  OF PAYMENTS

1.   Persons  having  claims  for  personal  labor,  maintenance, expenses of last illness and funeral of the wife or children of  the  debtor  incurred  in  60  days  immediately  preceding the filing of the petition 2.   Persons having legal or contractual mortgages  

RULE   OF   DOUBLE   MAJORITY   IN   THE   MEANING   OF CREDITORS

     The majority shall be 2/3 of the creditors voting upon the same proposition, which 2/3 represent at least 3/5 of the total liabilities of the debtor      Any  creditor,  at  any  stage  of  the  proceedings,  may  be represented by his attorney or duly authorized agent who shall  be  entitled  to  vote  when  properly  authorized  at  any creditors’ meeting as and for his principal  WHEN  PETITION  FOR  SUSPENSION  OF PAYMENTS DEEMED REJECTED 1.   When the number of creditors representing at least 3/5 of the liabilities don’t attend 2.   When  the  two  majorities  required  are  not  in  favor  of  the proposed agreement  

EFFECT OF DISAPPROVAL OF PETITION

     If the decision of the  meeting be  negative as regards the proposed  agreement  or  if  no  decision  is  had  in  default  of such  number  of  such  majorities,  the  proceedings  shall  be terminated without recourse      In  such  case,  the  parties  concerned  shall  be  at  liberty  to enforce the rights which correspond to them

CAUSES   FOR   WHICH   OBJECTION   MAY   BE   MADE   TO DECISION OF THE MEETING

37

Page 38: SUMMARY - Salescredit

     Defects in the call for the meeting, in the holding thereof, and  in  the  deliberation  had  there  at  which  prejudice  the rights of the creditors      Fraudulent connivance between one or more creditors and the debtor in favor of the proposed agreement      Fraudulent   conveyance  of  claims  for  the   purpose   of obtaining a majority 

SECTION   2.     Petition.   —   The  debtor   who,  possessing sufficient property to cover all his debts, be it an individual person,   be  it  a  sociedad   or  corporation,  foresees  the impossibility  of  meeting  them  when  they  respectively  fall due,  may  petition  that  he  be  declared  in  the  state  of suspension of payments by the court,  or the judge thereof in  vacation,  of  the  province  or  of  the  city  in  which  he  has resided  for  six  months  next  preceding  the  filing  of  his petition.  He  shall  necessarily  annex  to  his  petition  a  schedule  and inventory in the form  provided in sections fifteen, sixteen, and  seventeen  of  this  Act,  in  addition  to  the  statement  of his  assets  and  liabilities  and  the  proposed  agreement  he requests of his creditors.  SECTION  3.     Meeting  of  Creditors;  Injunction.  —  Upon receiving  and  filing  the  petition  with  the  schedule  and documents  mentioned  in  the  next  preceding  section,  the court, or the judge thereof in vacation, shall make an order calling a meeting of creditors to take place in not less than two weeks nor more than eight weeks from the date of such order. Said order shall designate the day, hour, and place of meeting of said creditors as well as a newspaper of general circulation  published  in  the  province  or  city  in  which  the petition is filed, if there be  one, and if there be none, in  a newspaper  which,  in  the  judgment  of  the  judge,  will  best give  notice  to  the  creditors  of  the  said  debtor,  and  in  the newspaper  so  designated  said  order  shall  be  published  as often  as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  court  or  the  judge thereof.  Said  order  shall  further  contain  an  absolute  injunction forbidding  the  petitioning  debtor  from  disposing  in  any manner  of  his  property,  except  in  so  far  as  concerns  the ordinary operations of commerce or of industry in which the petitioner  is  engaged,  and,  furthermore,  from  making  any payments  outside  of  the  necessary  or  legitimate  expenses of  his  business  or  industry,  so  long  as  the  proceedings relative  to  the  suspension  of  payments  are  pending,  and said  proceedings  for  the  purposes  of  this  Act  shall  be considered  to  have  been  instituted  from  the  date  of  the filing of the petition.  SECTION  4.     Publication  order;  Deposit.  —  A  copy  of  said order shall immediately be published 1 by the clerk of said court, in the newspaper designated therein, for the number of  times  and  in  the  form  prescribed  by  the  court  or  the judge thereof, and the clerk of said court shall cause a copy of  said  order  to  be  delivered  personally  or  to  be  sent forthwith   by   registered   mail,   postage   prepaid,   to   all creditors named in the schedule. There shall be deposited in addition to the sum of twenty-four Philippine pesos, which shall  be  paid  to  the  clerk  for  the  filing  and  registration  of the  petition,  including  all  proceedings  until  the  expediente is completed, an amount sufficient to defray all expense of publication  ordered  by  the  court,  necessary  postage,  and ten  centavos  for  each  copy,  to  be  delivered  personally  or mailed  to  the  creditors,  which  last-named  sum  is  hereby constituted  the  legal  fee  of  the  clerk  for  the  personal delivery      or      mailing      required      by     this     section.  SECTION  5.     Creditors  cited  to  appear.  —  Only  creditors included in the schedule filed by the debtor shall be cited to appear  and  take  part  in  the  meeting  mentioned  in  section three,   and   they   shall   be   notified   upon   delivery   or transmission  to  them  of  a  copy  of  the  order  calling  the meeting  to  appear  at  same  with  the  written  evidences  of their  respective  claims,  without  which  they  shall  not  be admitted.  SECTION  6.     Pending  Execution.  —  If  any  execution  be pending against the debtor it shall not be consolidated with this proceeding, but the course thereof shall be suspended

38

Page 39: SUMMARY - Salescredit

before  sale  of  property  is  made  thereunder,  provided  the debtor makes a request therefor to the court before which the  proceeding  for  suspension  of  payments  is  pending, unless   the   execution   be   against   property   especially mortgaged  which  is  hereby  exempted  from  the  least  the provisions of this section. The suspension ordered by virtue of  this  section  shall  lapse  when  three  months  shall  have passed without the proposed agreement being accepted by the creditors or as soon as it is denied. No creditor and the other  than  those  mentioned  in  section  nine  shall  sue  or institute  proceedings  to  collect  his  claim  from  the  debtor from  the  moment  that  suspension  of  payments  is  applied for      and      while      the      proceedings      are      pending.  SECTION 7.    Creditors may be represented at the meeting by  one  or  more  lawyers  or  by  any  person  authorized  by power of attorney, which document shall be presented and be attached to the record.  Persons  appearing  for  more  than  one  creditor  shall  have only  one  personal  vote,  but  the  claims  presented  by  them shall be taken into consideration for the purpose of arriving at      the      majority      of      the      amount      represented.  SECTION   8.      Creditors   necessary   to   hold   a   meeting; Meeting;  Minutes  of  the  meeting.  —  The  presence  of  the creditors  representing  at  least  three-fifths  the  liabilities shall be necessary for holding a meeting. The meeting shall be  held  on  the  day  and  at  the  hour  and  place  designated, the  judge,  or  commissioner  deputized  by  him  when  he  is absent from the province where the meeting is held, acting as  president  and  the  clerk  as  secretary  thereof,  subject  to the following rules:  (a)    The clerk shall prepare for insertion in the minutes of the  meeting  a  statement  of  the  persons  present  and  their claims; the judge, or, in default thereof, the commissioner, shall  examine  the  written  evidences  of  the  claims  and  the powers of attorney, if any. If the persons present who have complied with the foregoing rules represent at least three-fifths  of  the  liabilities,  the  judge  or  commissioner  shall declare        the        meeting        open        for        business.  (b)    The petition of the debtor, the schedule of debts and of property, the statement of assets and liabilities, and the proposed   agreement   filed   there-   with   shall   be   read forthwith by the clerk, and the discussion shall be opened.   (c)    The debtor may modify his proposition or propositions in view of the result of the debate, or insist upon the ones already  made,  and  the  judge  or  commissioner,  without further discussion, shall clearly and succinctly  place  these several   propositions   before   the   meeting   for   a   vote thereupon.   (d)    The vote shall be taken by a call of names and shall be inserted  in  and  the  minutes;  a  majority  vote  shall  rule.  (e)        To     form     a     majority     it     is     necessary     —  1.     That  two-thirds  of  the  creditors  voting  unite  upon  the same position.  2.     That  the  claims  represented  by  said  majority  vote amount to at least three-fifths of the total liabilities of the debtor mentioned in the petition.  (f)    After the result of the voting has been announced, all protests made against the majority vote shall be drawn up, and  there  shall  be  inserted  therein  the  proposition  or propositions voted upon, which, after having been read and approved,  shall  be  signed  by  the  judge  or  commissioner together  with  all  persons  taking  part  in  the  voting;  if  any such  persons  shall  be  unable  to  write,  any  person  present shall sign, at their request, and the clerk shall certify to all of the above.  

39

Page 40: SUMMARY - Salescredit

SECTION  9.     Persons  who  may  refrain  from  voting.  — Persons  having  claims  for  personal  labor,  maintenance, expenses  of last illness and funeral  of the  wife or children of  the  debtor,  incurred  in  the  sixty  days  immediately preceding  the  filing  of  the  petition,  and  persons  having legal or contractual mortgages, may refrain from attending the meeting and from voting therein. Such persons shall not be  bound  by  any  agreement  determined  upon  at  such meeting, but if they should join in the voting they shall be bound  in  the  same  manner  as  are  the  other  creditors.  SECTION  10.     Rejection  of  agreement.  —  The  proposed agreement  shall  be  deemed  rejected  if  the  number  of creditors  required  for  holding  a  meeting  do  not  attend thereat,  or  if  the  two  majorities  mentioned  in  rule  (e)  of section eight are  not in favor thereof, even if the negative vote     itself     does      not     receive     such     majorities.  SECTION    11.       Termination    of    proceedings    without recourse; Court hearing. — If the decision of the meeting be negative  as  regards  the  proposed  agreement  or  if  no decision  is  had  in  default  of  such  number  or  of   such majorities,  the  proceeding  shall  be  terminated  without recourse  and  the  parties  concerned  shall  be  at  liberty  to enforce  the  rights  which  may  correspond  to  them.  If  the decision  is  favorable  to  the  debtor  it  may  be  objected  to within  ten  days  following  the  date  of  the  meeting  by  any creditor who attended the meeting and who dissented from and   protested   against   the   vote   of   the   majority.   The opposition  or  objection  to  the  decision  of  the  majority favorable  to  the  debtor  shall  be  proceeded  with  as  in  any other  incidental  motion,  the  debtor  and  the  creditors  who shall appear declaring their purpose to sustain the decision of  the  meeting  being  the  defendants.  The  court  shall  hear and  pass   upon  such  objection  as  soon  as  possible  in  a summary  manner,  and  in  its  order,  which  shall  be  final,  it shall declare whether or not the decision of the meeting is valid. In case that the decision of the meeting is held to be null, the court shall declare the proceeding terminated and the parties concerned at liberty to exercise the rights which may  correspond  to  them;  and  in  case  the  decision  of  the meeting   is   declared   valid,   or   when   no   opposition   or objection  to  said  decision  has  been  presented,  the  court shall  order  that  the  agreement  be  carried  out  and  the persons  concerned  shall  be  bound  by  the  decision  of  the meeting. The court may also issue all orders which may be proper  to  enforce  the  agreement  on  motion  of  any  of  the parties  litigant.  The  order  directing  the  agreement  to  be made effective shall be binding upon all creditors included in the schedule of the debtor who may have been properly summoned,  but  not  upon  creditors  mentioned  in  section nine  who  failed  to  attend  the  meeting  or  refrained  from voting therein, and their rights shall not be affected by the agreement  unless  they  may  have  expressly  or  impliedly consented thereto.  SECTION 12.    The causes for which objection may be made to     the     decision     of     the     meeting     shall     be     —  (a)     Defects  in  the  call  for  the  meeting,  in  the  holding thereof,  and  in  and  the  deliberations  had  thereat  which prejudice         the         rights         of         the         creditors;  (b)    Fraudulent connivance between one or more creditors and  in  debtor  to  vote  in  favor  of  the  proposed  agreement;  (c)     Fraudulent  conveyance  of  claims  for  the  purpose  of obtaining a majority.  SECTION 13.    Failure of debtor to perform agreement. — If the debtor fails wholly or in part to perform the agreement decided upon at the meeting of the creditors, all the rights which  the  creditors  had  against  the  debtor  before  the agreement  shall  revest  in  them.  In  such  case  the  debtor may  be  made  subject  to  the  bankruptcy  and  insolvency proceedings  in  the  manner  established  by  the  following chapters of this Act.

VOLUNTARY INSOLVENCY, Insolvency Law- ACT NO. 1956

40

Page 41: SUMMARY - Salescredit

KINDS OF INSOLVENCY

1.   Voluntary  insolvency—an  insolvent  debtor  owing  debts exceeding in amount in the sum of P1000, may apply to be discharged from his debts and liabilities by petition to the RTC of the  province or city in  which he  has resided for 6 months next preceding the filing of the petition 2.   Involuntary insolvency—an adjudication of insolvency may be made  by the petition  of 3 or  more creditors, residents of  the  Philippines,  whose  credits  or  demands  accrued  in the   Philippines,   for   the   amount   of   which   credits   or demands are in the aggregate of not less than P1000  

STEPS IN VOLUNTARY INSOLVENCY

1.   Filing  of  the  petition  by  the  debtor  praying  for  the declaration of insolvency 2.   Issuance  of  order  of  adjudication  declaring  the  petitioner insolvent 3.   Publication and service of the order 4.   Meeting of the creditors to elect the assignee in insolvency  5.   Conveyance  of the debtor’s property by the clerk of court to the assignee 6.   Liquidation of the debtor’s assets and payment of his debts 7.   Composition, if agreed upon 8.   Discharge  of  the  debtor  on  his  application,  except  a corporation 9.   Objection, if any, to the discharge 10. Appeal to the SC in certain cases  

REQUISITES OF PETITION FOR VOLUNTARY INSOLVENCY THE PETITION WHICH MUST BE VERIFIED, IS TO BE FILED—

1.   By an insolvent debtor 2.   Owing debts exceeding in amount of the sum of P1000 3.   In the RTC of the province or city in which he has resided for 6 months next preceding the filing of such petition 4.   Setting forth in his petition the following a.    His place of residence  b.   The  period  of  residence  therein  immediately  prior to filing said petition c.    His inability to pay all his debts in full d.   His   willingness   to   surrender   all   his   property, estate, and  effects  not exempt from  execution for the benefit of creditors e.    An application to be adjudged an insolvent  

EFFECT OF FILING OF PETITION - Once  the  petition  is  filed,  it  ipso  facto  takes  away  and deprives the debtor petitioner of the right to do or commit any  act  of  preference  as  to  creditors,  pending  the  final adjudication  DOCUMENTS TO ACCOMPANY THE PETITION

1.   A verified schedule must contain— a.    A full and true statement of all debts and liabilities of the insolvent debtor b.   An  outline  of  the  facts  giving  rise  or  which  might give   rise   to   a   cause   of   action   against   such insolvent debtor 2.   A verified inventory which must contain— a.    An accurate description of all the personal and real property  of  the  insolvent  exempt  or  not  from execution  including  a  statement  as  of  its  value, location and encumbrances thereon b.   An  outline  of  the  facts  giving  rise  or  which  might give  rise  to  a  right  of  action  in  favor  of  the insolvent debtor   

41

Page 42: SUMMARY - Salescredit

FILING OF SCHEDULE AND INVENTORY, JURISDICTIONAL

     On  filing  a  petition  for  a  discharge  from  his  debts,  an insolvent  is  required  to  present  a  verified  schedule  of liabilities and a verified inventory of his properties      The presentation of such documents stating the amount of each   creditor’s   claim   is   a   jurisdictional   requirement, without  the  proper  performance  of  which  his  subsequent discharge will be of no avail  

EFFECT  OF  ERRORS  IN  DESCRIPTION  OR  OMISSION  OF PROPERTY IN INVENTORY

     That the property is erroneously or ambiguously described in  the  insolvent’s  inventory  will  not  affect  the  title  of purchasers in the insolvency proceedings.  All the property of the insolvent passes to his assignee and is administered in  the  insolvency  proceedings  regardless  of  errors  in  the insolvency.      If the insolvent omits property from his inventory, through either  mistake  or  fraud,  it  is  the  duty  of  the  assignee  to have  the  inventory  amended  so  as  to  include  it  and  take possession and administer it      Even property exempt from execution must be included in order to preclude possible  fraudulent  omissions  under the pretext  that  such  property  is  exempt.    But  where  the petitioner  didn’t  attach  an  inventory  to  its  petition  for insolvency,  alleging  under  oath that it had no property to inventory,  the  lack  of  inventory  was  held  not  fatal  to  the petition  because  it  was  assumed,  until  proven  otherwise, that the petitioner was stating the truth.  

EFFECT OF COURT ORDER DECLARING DEBTOR INSOLVENT 

1.   All the assets of the debtor not exempt from execution are taken possession of by the sheriff until the appointment of a receiver or assignee 2.   The  payment  to  the  debtor  of  any  debts  due  to  him  and the delivery to the debtor or to any person for him of any property  belonging  to  him,  and  the  transfer   of  any property to him are forbidden 3.   All  civil  proceedings  pending  against  the  insolvent  debtor shall be stayed 4.   Mortgages   or   pledges,   attachments   or  executions   on property of the debtor duly recorded and not dissolved are not, however, affected by the order  

IF  YOU  ARE  THE  DEBTOR,  WHY  WOULD  YOU  FILE  FOR INSOLVENCY?

     The debtor will get a discharge       A corporation doesn’t get a discharge       The partners in a partnership will get a discharge

Insolvency Law ACT NO. 1956

SECTION  14.     Application.  —  An  insolvent  debtor,  owing debts exceeding in amount the sum of one thousand pesos, may apply to be discharged from his debts and liabilities by petition to the Court of First Instance of province or city in which  he  has  resided  for  six  months  next  preceding  the filing of such petition. In his petition he shall set forth his of residence,  the  period  of  his  residence  therein  immediately prior to filing said petition, his inability to pay all his debts in full, his willingness to surrender all his property, estate, and effects not exempt from execution for the benefit of his creditors,  and  an  application  to  be  adjudged  an  insolvent. He  shall  annex  to  his  petition  a  schedule  and  inventory  in the  form  herein-after  provided.  The  filing  of  such  petition shall be an act of insolvency.  SECTION  15.     Statement  of  debts  and  liabilities.  —  Said  schedule  must  contain  a  full  and  true  statement  of  all  his debts  and  liabilities,  together  with  a  list  of  all  those  to whom, to the best of his knowledge and belief, said debts or liabilities  are  due,  the  place  of  residence  of  his  creditors and  the  sum  due  each  the  nature  of  the  indebtedness  or liability    and    whether   

42

Page 43: SUMMARY - Salescredit

founded    on    written    security, obligation,   contract   or   otherwise,   the   true   cause   and consideration thereof, the time and place  when and where such indebtedness or liability accrued, a declaration of any existing pledge, lien, mortgage, judgment, or other security for the payment of the debt or liability, and an outline of the facts  giving  rise  or  which  might  give  rise  to  a  cause  of action against such insolvent          debtor.  SECTION 16.    Description of real and personal property. — Said  inventory  must  contain,  besides  the  creditors,  an accurate  description  of  all  the  real  and  personal  property, estate,   and   effects   of   the   petitioner,   including   his homestead, if any, together with a statement of the value of each  item  of  said  property,  estate,  and  effects  and  its location, and a statement of the encumbrances thereon. All property exempt by law from execution 2 shall be set out in said  inventory  with  a  statement  of  its  valuation,  location, and the encumbrances thereon, if any. The inventory shall contain  an  outline  of  the  facts  giving  rise,  or  which  might give  rise,  to  a  right  of  action  in  favor  of  the  insolvent debtor.  SECTION   17.      Verification,   form   of   .   —   The   petition, schedule, and inventory must be verified by the affidavit of the  petitioner,  annexed  thereto,  and  shall  be  in  form substantially    as    follows:    "I,    _______________.,    do solemnly   swear   that   the   schedule   and   inventory   now delivered by me contain a full, correct, and true discovery of all my debts and liabilities and of all goods, effects, estate, and  property  of  whatever  kind  or  class  to  me  in  any  way belonging.  The  inventory  also  contains  a  full,  true  and correct statement of all debts owing or due to me, or to any person or  persons in trust for  me and  of all securities and contracts whereby any money may hereafter become due or payable  to  me  or  by  or  through  which  any  benefit  or advantage whatever may accrue to me or to my use,  or to any  other  person  or  persons  in  trust  for  me.  The  schedule contains  a  clear  outline  of  the  facts  giving  rise,  or  which might  give  rise,  to  a  cause  of  action  against  me,  and  the inventory  contains  an  outline  of  the  facts  giving  rise,  or which might give rise, to any cause of action in my favor. I had   no   lands,   money,   stock,   or   estate,   reversion,   or expectancy, or property of any kind, except that set forth in said inventory. I have no instance created or acknowledged a  debt  for  a  greater  sum  than  I  honestly  and  truly  owe.  I have not, directly or indirectly, concealed, fraudulently sold, or  otherwise  fraudulently  disposed  of,  any  part  of  my  real or personal property, estate, effects, or rights of action, and I have not in any way compounded with any of my creditors in order to secure such creditors, or to receive or to accept any profit or advantage therefrom, or to defraud or deceive in any manner any creditor to whom I am indebted. So help me God."  SECTION 18.    Order of court declaring petitioner insolvent; Publication notice. — Upon receiving and filing said petition, schedule, and inventory, the  court,  or the judge thereof in vacation,  shall  make  an  order  declaring  the  petitioner insolvent, and directing the sheriff of the province or city in which the petition is filed to take possession of, and safely keep,  until  the  appointment  of  a  receiver  or  assignee,  all the  deeds,  vouchers,  books  of  account,  papers,  notes, bonds,  bills,  and  securities  of  the  debtor,  and  all  his  real and  personal  property,  estate,  and  effects,  except  such  as may  be  by  law  exempt  from  execution.  3  Said  order  shall further forbid the payment to the debtor of any debts due to him and the delivery to the debtor, or to any person for him, and  the  transfer  of  any  property  by  him,  and  shall  further appoint  a  time  and  place  for  a  meeting  of  the  creditors  to choose an assignee of the estate. Said order shall designate a   newspaper   of   general   circulation   published   in   the province  or  city  in  which  the  petition  is  filed,  if  there  be one,  and  if  there  be  none,  in  a  newspaper  which,  in  the opinion of the judge, will best give notice to the creditors of the said insolvent, and in the newspaper so designated said order shall be published 4 as often as may be prescribed by the court or the judge The time appointed for the election of an assignee shall not be less than two, nor more than eight, weeks from the date of the order of adjudication. Upon the granting of said order all civil proceedings pending against said   insolvent   shall   be   stayed.   When   a   receiver   is appointed,  or  an  assignee  chosen,  as  provided  in  this  Act, the  sheriff  shall 

43

Page 44: SUMMARY - Salescredit

thereupon  deliver  to  such  receiver  or assignee  chosen,  as  provided  in  this  Act,  the  sheriff  shall thereupon deliver to such receiver or assignee, as the case may  be,  all  the  property,  assets,  and  belongings  of  the insolvent which have come into his possession, and he shall be  allowed  and  paid  as  compensation  for  his  services  the same  expenses  and  fees  as  would  by  law  be  collectible  if the  property  had  been  levied  upon  and  safely  kept  under attachment.  SECTION 19.    Publication of order. — A copy of said order shall immediately be published 5 by the clerk of said court, in  the  newspaper  designated  therein,  for  the  number  of times and as prescribed by the court  or  the judge thereof, and  a  copy  of  said  order  shall  be  delivered  personally  or sent  by  the  clerk  forthwith  by  registered  mail,  postage prepaid, to all creditors named in the schedule. There shall be deposited, in addition to twenty-four pesos, which shall be received by the clerk on commencing such proceedings, a  sum  of  money  sufficient  to  defray  the  expense  of  the ublication  ordered  by  the  court,  necessary  postage,  and ten  centavos  for  each  copy,  to  be  delivered  personally  or mailed  to  the  creditors,  which  last-named  sum  is  hereby constituted  the  legal  fee  of  the  clerk  for  the  personal delivery or mailing required by this section.

INVOLUNTARY INSOLVENCYAct No. 1956

NATURE OF INVOLUNTARY INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS

> An  involuntary  insolvency  isn’t  a  mere  personal  action against  the  insolvent  for  the  collection  of  debts;  but  its purpose  is  to  impound  all  of  his  non-exempt  property,  to distribute  it  equitably  among  his  creditors  and  to  release him from further liability> It is an action in rem and action in personam

WHO MAY PETITION FOR INVOLUNTARY INSOLVENCY

1.   They  have  the  qualifications  required  by  the  Insolvency Law2.   Their   credits   must   be   those   contemplated   by   the Insolvency Law

STEPS IN INVOLUNTARY INSOLVENCY

1.   Filing of the petition by three or more creditors2.   Issuance of order requiring the debtor to show cause why he shouldn’t be adjudged insolvent3.   Service of order to show cause4.   Filing of answer or motion to dismiss5.   Hearing of the case6.   Issuance of order or decision adjudging debtor insolvent 7.   Publication and service of order8.   Meeting   of   creditors   for   election   of   an   assignee   in insolvency9.   Conveyance of debtor’s property by clerk of court10. Liquidation of assets and payments of debts11. Composition, if agreed upon12. Discharge  of  the  debtor  on  his  application,  except  a corporation13. Objection if any to the discharge14. Appeal to the SC in certain cases

WHY  IS  THERE  NO  NEED  TO  ATTACH  SCHEDULE  AND  WHY IS THERE A NEED FOR VERIFICATION?

> Answer behind this isn’t legal> It  is  not  required  because  the  creditors  are  not  in  the position in the first place to know

44

Page 45: SUMMARY - Salescredit

WHO WILL ULTIMATELY SUBMIT THE SCHEDULE OF ASSETS AND  LIABILITIES?   

The  debtor.    In  case  of  his  absence,  the assignee may be required to submit as far as practicable. 

IS THERE ANYTHING CREDITOR CAN DO IN THE MEANTIME?  DEBTOR  CAN  HAVE  POSSESSION  OF  PROPERTY  BETWEEN STEPS 1 AND 2.

> The  creditor  may  ask  for  the  appointment  of  a  receiver during steps 1 and 2 as provisional remedy to prevent the leak of assets

WHAT  IS  THE  RECOURSE  OF  THE  DEBTOR  WHEN  THE CREDITOR FILED FOR INSOLVENCY FOR THE SOLE PURPOSE OF HARASSMENT?

> File  for  damages  and  if  you  are  thinking  criminal,  file  for perjury.> Recover from the bond posted by the creditors

REQUISITES OF PETITION FOR INVOLUNTARY INSOLVENCY THE PETITION IS TO BE FILED BY

1.   Three or more creditors2.   None of whom has become such a creditor by assignment, within 30 days prior to the filing of petition3.   Whose credits accrued in the Philippines4.   The total amount of which credits is not less than P1000

5.   In  the  RTC  of  the  province  or  city  in  which  the  debtor resides or has his principal place of business

THE PETITION--

6.   Must  be  verified  by  at  least  three  of  the  petitioning creditors 7.   Must set forth one or more acts of insolvency mentioned in the law8.   Must  be  accompanied  by  a  bond,  approved  by  the  court with at least two sureties, in such penal sum as the court shall direct

ACTS OF INSOLVENCY

1.   Intention  to  depart  or  departure  from  the  Philippines  to defraud creditors2.   Absence from the Philippines to defraud creditors3.   Concealment of debtor to avoid legal process4.   Concealment  or  removal  of  his  property  to  avoid  legal process5.   Confession of judgment in favor of any creditor to defraud other creditors6.   Allowing default judgment in favor of a creditor to defraud other creditors7.   Allowing  his  property  to  be  taken  under  legal  process  in preference   of   a   particular   creditor   to   defraud   other creditors8.   Making conveyance, assignment or transfer of his property to defraud creditors9.   Making conveyance, assignment or transfer of his property in contemplation of insolvency10. Default  of  a  merchant  or  tradesman  to  pay  his  current obligations for a period of 30 days11. Failure to pay money on deposit or received in a fiduciary capacity for a period of 30 days after demand12. Insufficiency  of  property  to  satisfy  an  execution  issued against him

ADJUDICATION OF INSOLVENCY

> If the respondent debtor  shall make a  default,  or if, after trial,  the  issues  are  found  in  favor  of  the  petitioning creditors, the court shall make an order adjudging the said respondent is and was, at the time of

45

Page 46: SUMMARY - Salescredit

filing of the petition, an insolvent debtor  and that the debtor was guilty  of the act and things charged in the petition or  such of them as the court may find to be true> The date of adjudication of insolvency retroacts to the date of the filing of the petition for insolvenc

ASSIGNEE IN INSOLVENCY

Insolvency Law - Act 1956

> An  assignee  is  the  person  elected  by  the  creditors  or appointed by the court to whom an insolvent debtor makes an  assignment  of  all  his  property  for  the  benefit  of  his creditors

CREDITORS  NOT  ENTITLED  TO  VOTE  IN  THE  ELECTION  OF ASSIGNEE

1.   Those  who  didn’t  file  their  claims  at  least  2  days  prior  to the time appointed for such election2.   Those claims are barred by the statute of limitations3.   Secured  creditors  unless  they  surrender  their  security  or lien to the sheriff or receiver or unless they shall first have the value of such security fixed as provided for in Section 594.   Holders  of  claims  for  unliquidated  damages  arising  out  of pure tort

IMPORTANT!  The vote requirement is DOUBLE MAJORITY.

ASSIGNEE’S TITLE VESTS ON FILING OF PETITION

> An assignee in insolvency acquires title to the property of the  insolvent  by  virtue  of  the  transfer  of  the  insolvent’s property by the clerk of court> But this instrument relates back to the commencement of the proceedings in insolvency with the result that the title of  the  assignee  is  determined  as  of  the  date  when  the petition in insolvency is filed> With   respect   to   property   registered   under   the   Land Registration Law, it is necessary that such proceedings be recorded    in    the    registry    of    deeds    from    their commencement and the assignment is likewise recorded

EFFECTS OF ASSIGNMENT

1.   The   assignee   takes   the   property   in   the   plight   and conditions that the insolvent held it

2.   Upon assignment, the legal title to all the property of the insolvent is vested in the assignee, and the control of the property is vested in the court3.   All  actions to recover the estate, debts  and effects  of the insolvent shall be brought by the assignee and not by the creditors 4.   The assignment shall—     a.    Dissolve  any  attachment  levied  within  1  month next    preceding    the    commencement    of    the insolvency proceedings     b.   Vacate  and  set  aside  judgment  entered  in  any action  commenced  within  30  days  immediately prior    to    the    commencement    of    insolvency proceedingsNOTE:  5.   There is a  cut-off  period—one month in attachment cases and 30 days in judgments entered  in actions  commenced rior to the insolvency proceedings.  A levy of attachment not made within the period specified isn’t dissolved by the insolvency  proceedings  and  the  refusal  of  the  court  to enforce  the  lien  arising  from  such  levy  is  grave  abuse  of discretion.6.   The plaintiff has the right if the attachment is not dissolved before   the   commencement   of   the   proceedings   in insolvency, or is dissolved by an undertaking given by the defendant, if the claim upon which the attachment suit was commenced is proved against the estate of the debtor.

46

Page 47: SUMMARY - Salescredit

BOND OF ASSIGNEE

> After  his  election,  he  is  required  to  give  a  bond  for  the faithful performance of his duties> To  establish  his  official  character  and  his  right  to  sue  in that capacity, it is incumbent on the assignee to show that the bond required has been given

PROPERTIES OF INSOLVENT THAT PASS TO THE ASSIGNEE

1.   All  real  and  personal  property,  estate  and  effects  of  the debtor  including  all  deeds,  books,  and  papers  in  relation thereto2.   Properties fraudulently conveyed 3.   Right of action for damages to real property4.   The undivided share for interest of the insolvent debtor in property held under co-ownership

PROPERTIES  OF  INSOLVENT  THAT  DOESN’T  PASS  TO  THE ASSIGNEE

1.   Property exempt from execution2.   Property held in trust3.   Property    of    the    conjugal    partnership    or    absolute community  so  long  as  said  partnership  or  community exists  except  insofar  as  the  insolvent  debtor’s  obligations have redounded to the benefit of the former4.   Property  over  which  a  mortgage  or  pledge  exists  unless the creditor surrenders his security or lien5.   After-acquired   property   except   fruits   and   income   of property owned by the debtor and which had passed to the assignee in insolvency law6.   Non-leviable  assets  like  a  life  insurance  policy  which doesn’t have cash surrender value7.   Right of action for tort which is purely personal in nature

POWERS OF ASSIGNEE

1.   To  sue  and  recover  all  the  estate,  assets,  debts,  and claims, belonging to or due to such debtor; 2.   To take in to  his  possession  all the estate  of  such  debtor except property exempt by law from execution,3.   In  case  of  a  nonresident  or  absconding  or  concealed debtor,  to  demand  and  receive  of  every  sheriff  who  shall have attached any of the property of such debtor, or who shall  have in his possession  any  moneys arising from the sale  of  such  property,  all  such  property  and  moneys,  on paying him his lawful costs and charges for attaching and keeping the same.4.   To sell, upon order of the court, any of the estate, real and personal, which has come into his possession, and which is vested  in  him  as  such  assignee,  and  on  such  sales  to execute the necessary conveyances and bills of sale.

5.   To  redeem  all  valid  mortgages  and  conditional  contracts, and  all  valid  pledges  of  personal  property,  and  to  satisfy any  judgments  which  may  be  an  encumbrance  on  any property sold by him;  or to  sell such  property, subject to such mortgage, contracts, pledges, judgments, or liens.

6.   To  settle  all  matters  and  accounts  between  such  debtor and his creditors subject to the approval of the court.7.   Under  the  order  of  the  court  or  judge  appointing  him,  to compound  with  any  person  indebted  to  such  debtor,  and thereupon discharge all demands against such person.8.   To  recover  from  any  person  receiving  a  conveyance,  gift transfer,  payment,  or  assignment,  made  contrary  to  any provision  of  this  Act,  the  property  thereby  transferred  or assigned; or in case a redelivery of the property can not be had,  to  recover  the  value  thereof  with  damages  for  thedetention.

DUTIES OF AN ASSIGNEE

47

Page 48: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   To register the assignment to him of the real estate of the debtor2.   To  file  a  schedule  and  inventory  of  the  property  of  the debtor3.   To  convert,  as  speedily  as  possible,  the  estate,  real  and person, into money     a.    Any disposition requires court approval     b.   Private sale needs authorization of the court

4.   To  keep  a regular account  of  all moneys received  by him as assignee     a.    Why is a private sale an exception?  Because there is always room for irregularity.     b.   Assignee  is  allowed  to  recover  the  expenses  he advanced for.     c.    There   is   a   distinction   between   claims   and expenses.  As creditor, WATCH OUT!5.   To  petition  the  court  to  allow  the  private  sale  of  debtor’s property if it appears that it is for the best interest of the estate6.   To file a just and true account of receipts and payments7.   To file accounts upon order of the court on motion of two or more creditors8.   To distribute such dividends as he may be required9.   To  file  a  final  account  within  one  year  from  the  date  of order of adjudication

SALE OF ASSETS

1.   Generally—the  law  provides  for  the  reduction  of  the insolvent’s  assets  into  cash  by  means  of  public  sales.  Proceedings are in rem.  The only question of jurisdiction is the  power  of  the  court  over  the  subject  matter  without regard to the parties who may have an interest in it. 2.   Persons  competent  to  purchase—the  insolvent  will  not  be generally allowed to purchase the assets, either in his own name  or  through  a  dummy.    If  he  does  so,  the  property purchased becomes subject to the claims of his creditors. 

APPLICABILITY OF SECTION 37

> The  provisions  of  Section  37  which  make  the  person coming  within  the  purview  liable  for  double  the  value  of the  property  sought  to  be  disposed  of,  are  not  applicable where  what  has  been  disposed  of  is  the  creditor’s  own credit and not the insolvent’s property

DIVIDENDS IN INSOLVENCY DEFINED

> Parcel  of  the  fund  arising  from  the  assets  of  the  estate, rightfully allotted to share in the fund, whether in the same proportion with other creditor or in a different proportion

> It is paid by the assignee only upon order of the court

EFFECT  OF  DEBTS  SUBSEQUENTLY  PROVED  ON  RIGHT  TO DIVIDENDS

> Whenever  any  dividend  has  been  duly  declared,  the distribution of it shall not be stayed or affected by reason of debts being subsequently proved> However, any creditor proving such a debt shall be entitled to  a  dividend  equal  to  those  already  received  by  other creditors before any further dividend is made to the latter, if  the  failure  to  prove  such  claim  shall  not  have  resulted from his own neglect

WHAT  WOULD  BE  COVERED  BY  THE  ASSETS?   

Assets  whose title is vested in the debtor—both equitable and legal title.  At least there is beneficial ownership.

48

Page 49: SUMMARY - Salescredit

CAN  INSOLVENCY  PROCEEDINGS  BE  FILED  AGAINST  THE HUSBAND ALONE?

No.

CAN  CORPORATIONS  AND  PARTNERSHIPS  BE  SUBJECT  TO INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS?

Yes.  However, it is not good to have voluntary proceedings. 

Insolvency Law Act 1956 on Assignees

SECTION  29.     Election;  Creditors  holding  security.  —  No creditor  shall  be  entitled  to  vote  for  the  election  of  an assignee unless he shall have filed his claim in the office of the clerk of the court in which the proceedings are pending at  least  two  days  prior  to  the  time  appointed  for  such election.  All  claims  shall  contain  a  statement  showing  the amount  and  nature  of  the  claim  and  security,  if  any.  The claim   shall   be   verified   by   the   claimant,   or   his   duly authorized  agent  or  attorney.  No  claim  barred  by  the statute of limitations 16 shall be proved or allowed against the  estate  of  an  insolvent  debtor  for  any  purpose.  Any person  interested  in  the  estate  of  the  insolvent  may  file exceptions  to  the  legality  of  good  faith  of  any  claim,  by setting forth specifically in writing his interest in the estate, and  the  grounds  of  his  objection  to  such  claim.  Such exceptions  shall  be  verified  by  the  affidavit  of  the  party objecting, or his duly authorized agent or attorney, and the affidavit shall set out that such exceptions are not made for the purpose of delay and are made in good faith in the best interests  of  said  estate.  Exceptions  to  any  claim  must  be filed with the clerk of the court at least one day before the time  appointed  for  the  election  of  an  assignee,  and  such exceptions shall be heard and disposed of by the court, on affidavit  or  other  evidence,  in  a  summary  manner,  before the  election  of  an  assignee.  No  creditor  or  claimant  who holds any mortgage, pledge, or lien of any kind whatever as security  for  the  payment  of  his  claim  or  attachment  or execution  on property  of the debtor duly  recorded and  not dissolved  under  this  Act  shall  be  permitted  to  vote  at  the election of the assignee any part of his secured claim unless he  shall  first  have  the  value  of  such  security  fixed  as provided section fifty-nine of this Act, or shall surrender to the sheriff or receiver of the estate of the insolvent, if there be a receiver, all such property, or assign such lien to such sheriff  or  receiver.  The  surrender  or  assignment  of  such security or lien shall be for the benefit of all creditors of the estate of the insolvent. The value of such security, if fixed by  the  court,  shall  be  so  fixed  at  least  one  day  before  the day  appointed  for  the  election  of  an  assignee,  in  which event  the  claimant  may  prove  his  demand  as  provided  in this section for any unsecured balance, subject to the filing of exceptions  as in all other claims.

SECTION  30.     Election  of  assignee  in  open  court.  —  At  a meeting of the creditors in open court or, if the court is not in session, in the presence of the judge or the clerk of the court,  those  being  entitled  to vote,  as  provided  by  section twenty-nine,  shall  proceed  to  the  election  of  an  assignee. The majority of the creditors who have proven their claims, such  majority  being  both  in  number  and  amount,  must concur for the election of an assignee. The clerk of the court shall  keep  a  minute  of  the  deliberations  of  said  creditors, and  of  the  election  and  appointment  of  the  assignee,  and enter  the  same  upon  the  records  of  the  court,  and,  in  the absence  of  the  judge,  shall  send  a  copy  of  such  record  to him at the place where he may be found. The assignee shall file,  within  five  days,  unless  the  time  be  extended  by  the court,  with  the  clerk,  a  bond,  in  an  amount  to  be  fixed  by the court, to the Government of the Philippine Islands, with two or more sufficient sureties, approved by the court, and conditioned  upon  the  faithful  performance  of  the  duties devolving  upon  him.  The  bond  shall  not  be  void  upon  the first recovery, but may be sued upon from time to time by any  person  aggrieved,  in  his  own  name,  until  the  whole penalty  be  exhausted.  The  sureties  on  such  bond  may  be required   to   justify   as   to   their   sufficiency   upon   the application of any party interested.

SECTION  31.     Appointment  of  assignee  by  court.  —  If,  on the day appointed for the meeting, creditors do not attend, or fail or refuse to elect an assignee, or if, after election, the assignee shall fail to qualify within the proper time, or if a vacancy  occurs  by  death  or  otherwise,  the  court  shall appoint  an  assignee  and  fix  the  amount  of  his  bond.

49

Page 50: SUMMARY - Salescredit

SECTION 32.    Transfer of property to assignee. — As soon as  an  assignee  is  elected  or  appointed  and  qualified,  the clerk  of  the  court  shall,  by  an  instrument  under  his  hand and seal of the court, assign and convey to the assignee all the  real  and  personal  property,  estate,  and  effects  of  the debtor  with  all  his  deeds,  books,  and  papers  relating thereto,  and  such  assignment  shall  relate  back  to  the commencement of the proceedings in insolvency, and shall relate  back  to  the  acts  upon  which  the  adjudication  was founded,  and  by  operation  of  law  shall  vest  the  title  to  all such property, estate, and effects in the assignee, although the  same  is  then  attached  on  mesne  process,  as  the property  of  the  debtor.  Such  assignment  shall  operate  to vest in the assignee all of the estate of the insolvent debtor not exempt by law from execution. 17 It shall also dissolve any attachment levied within one month next preceding the commencement  of  the  insolvency  proceedings  and  vacate and   set   aside   any   judgment   entered   in   any   action commenced  within  thirty  days  immediately  prior  to  the commencement of insolvency proceedings and shall vacate and set aside any execution issued thereon and shall vacate and set aside any judgment entered by default or consent of the  debtor  within  thirty  days  immediately  prior  to  the commencement      of      the      insolvency      proceedings.

SECTION  33.     Recovery  and  action  of  assignee.  —  The assignee shall have the right to recover all the state debts, and   effects   of   said   insolvent.   If,   at   the   time   of   the commencement  of  proceeings  in  insolvency,  an  action  is pending  in  the  name  of  the  debtor,  for  the  recovery  of  a debtor  other  thing  which  might  or  ought  to  pass  to  the assignee by the assignment, the assignee shall be allowed and  admitted  to  prosecute  the  action,  in  like  manner  and with  like  effect  as  if  it  had  been  originally  commenced  by him.  If  there  are  any  rights  of  action  in  favor  of  the insolvent for damages, on any account, for which an action is   not   pending,   the   assignee   shall   have   the   right   toprosecute  the  same  with  the  same  effect  as  the  insolvent might  have  done  himself  if  no  proceedings  in  insolvency had  been  instituted.  If  any  action  or  proceeding  in  which the  insolvent  is  defendant  is  pending  at  the  time  of  the adjudication,  the  assignee  may  defend  the  same  in  the same  manner  and  with  like  effect  as  it  might  have  been defended by the insolvent. In a suit prosecuted or defended by the assignee, a certified copy of the assignment made to him shall be conclusive evidence of  his authority to sue  or defend.

SECTION  34.     Registration  of  assignment  to  assignee.  — The  assignee  shall,  within  one  month  after  the  making  of the  assignment  to  him,  cause  the  same  to  be  recorded  in every  province  or  city  within  the  Philippine  Islands  where any  real  estate  owned  by  the  debtor  is  situated,  and  the record of such assignment, or a duly certified copy thereof, shall  be  conclusive  evidence  thereof  in  all  courts.  If  the schedule and inventory required by this Act have not been filed  by  the  debtor  the  assignee  shall,  within  one  month after  his  election,  prepare  and  file  such  schedule  and inventory from the best information he can obtain, and shall thereupon   personally   deliver   notice   or   send   same   by registered  mail,  postage  prepaid,  to  all  creditors  named  in such   schedule,   whose   claims   have   not   been   filed,   to forthwith prove their demands.

SECTION  35.     Resignation  of  assignee.  —  Any  assignee may  at  any  time,  by  writing  filed  in  court,  resign  his appointment, having first settled his accounts and delivered up  all  the  deeds,  vouchers,  books  of  account,  notes,  bills, bonds,  and  securities  of  the  debtor  and  all  his  real  and personal property, estate, and effects to such successor as the  court  shall  appoint:  Provided,  That  if,  in  the  discretion of the court, the circumstances of the case require it, upon good cause being shown, the court may, at any time before such settlement of account and delivery of the estate shall have  been  completed,  revoke  the  appointment  of  such assignee  and  appoint  another  in  his  stead.  The  liability  of the outgoing assignee, or of the sureties on his bond, shall not  be  in  any  manner  discharged,  released,  or  affected  by such      appointment      of      another      in      his      stead.

SECTION   36.      The   said   assignee   shall   have   power:

1.     To  sue  and  recover  all  the  estate,  assets,  debts,  and claims, belonging to or due to such debtor; and no set-off or counterclaim   shall   be   allowed   in   any   such   for   debts contracted by the insolvent  within thirty days  immediately preceding  the  filing  of  the  petition  of  insolvency  except  in case  of  creditors 

50

Page 51: SUMMARY - Salescredit

specified  in  section  fifty  of  this  Act.

2.     To  take  in  to  his  possession  all  the  estate  of  such debtor  except  property  exempt  by  law  from  execution,  2. whether   attached   or   delivered   to   him,   or   afterwards discovered,    and    all    books,    vouchers,    evidence    of indebtedness,   and   securities   belonging   to   the   same.  3.     In  case  of  a  nonresident  or  absconding  or  concealed debtor,  to  demand  and  receive  of  every  sheriff  who  shall have  attached  any  of  the  property  of  such  debtor,  or  who shall  have  in  his  possession  any  moneys  arising  from  the sale  of  such  property,  all  such  property  and  moneys,  on paying  him  his  lawful  costs  and  charges  for  attaching  and keeping the same.

4.     From  time  to  time  to  sell  at  public  auction  after advertisement  in  the  manner  provided  by  subsections  (1), (2),  and  (3)  of  section  four  hundred  and  fifty-four  of  the Code of Civil Procedure, 19 upon order of the court, any of the  estate,  real  and  personal,  which  has  come  into  his possession,  and  which  is  vested  in  him  as  such  assignee, and  on  such  sales  to  execute  the  necessary  conveyances and bills of sale.

5.      To   redeem   all   valid   mortgages   and   conditional contracts, and all valid pledges of personal property, and to satisfy  any  judgments  which  may  be  an  encumbrance  on any property sold by him; or to sell such property, subject to  such  mortgage,  contracts,  pledges,  judgments,  or  liens.

6.    To settle all matters and accounts between such debtor and  his  creditors  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  court.

7.    Under the order of the court or judge appointing him, to compound  with  any  person  indebted  to  such  debtor,  and thereupon  discharge  all  demands  against  such  person.

8.     To  recover  from  any  person  receiving  a  conveyance, gift transfer, payment, or assignment, made contrary to any provision  of  this  Act,  the  property  thereby  transferred  or assigned; or in case a redelivery of the property can not be had,  to  recover  the  value  thereof  with  damages  for  the detention.

SECTION 37.    Embezzlement, etc. — If any person, before the    assignment    is    made,     having    notice    of    the commencement of the proceedings in insolvency, or having reason to believe that insolvency proceedings  are about to be   commenced,   embezzles   or   disposes   of   any   of   the moneys,  goods,  chattels,  or  effects  of  the  insolvent,  he  is chargeable   therewith,   and   liable   to   an   action   by   the assignee for double the value of the property so embezzled or  disposed  of,  to  be  recovered  for  the  benefit  of  the insolvent's estate.

SECTION   38.      Penalties   and   forfeitures.   —   The   same penalties,    forfeitures,    and    proceedings    by    citation, examination,  and  commitment  shall  apply  on  behalf  of  an assignee  against  persons  suspected  of  having  concealed, embezzled, conveyed away, or disposed  of any property  of the  debtor,  or  of  having  possession  or  knowledge  of  any deeds,  conveyances,  bonds,  contracts,  or  other  writings which  relate  to  any  interest  of  the  debtor  in  any  real  or personal  estate  as  provided  in  the  case  of  estates  of deceased  persons  in  sections  seven  hundred  and  nine  to seven  hundred  and  thirteen,  inclusive,  of  the  Code  of  Civil Procedure.

SECTION  39.     Conversion  of  property  into  money.  —  The assignee  shall  as  speedily  as  possible  convert  the  estate, real  and  personal,  into  money.  He  shall  keep  a  regular account of all moneys received by him as assignee, to which every creditor or other person interested therein may, at all reasonable  times,  have  access.  No  private  sale  of  any property of the estate of an insolvent debtor shall be valid unless made under the order of the court, upon a petition in writing, which shall set forth the facts showing the sale to be necessary. Upon filing the petition, notice of the hearing thereof  of  at  least  ten  days  shall  be  given  by  publication and  mailing,  in  the  same  manner  as  is  provided  in  section nineteen of this Act. If it appears that a private sale is for the best interests of the estate, the court shall order it to be made.

SECTION  40.     Perishable  property.  —  In  all  cases  when  it appears  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  court 

51

Page 52: SUMMARY - Salescredit

that  the  estate  of the debtor, or any part thereof, is of a perishable nature, or is  liable  to  deteriorate  in  value,  or  is  disproportionately expensive  to  keep,  and  that  the  insolvent's  estate  will suffer if sufficient time elapses for the giving of notice, the court may order the same to be sold in such manner and at such  time  as  may  be  deemed  most  expedient,  under  the direction  of  the  sheriff,  receiver,  or  assignee,  as  the  case may  be,  who  shall  hold  the  funds  received  in  place  of  the property    sold    until    further    order    of    the    court.

SECTION   41.      Outstanding   debts,   etc.   due   estate.   — Outstanding  debts,  or  other  property  due  or  belonging  to the estate,  which can  not be collected and received by the assignee  without  unreasonable  or  inconvenient  delay  or expense,  may  be  sold  and  assigned  in  like  manner  as  the remainder of the estate. If there are any rights of action for damages    in    favor    of    the    insolvent    prior    to    the commencement  of  the  insolvency  proceedings,  the  same may,  with  the  approval  of  the  court,  be  compromised.

SECTION   42.      Expenses   and   commissions;   Division   of compensation.  —  Assignees  shall  be  allowed  all  necessary expenses  in  the  care,  management,  and  settlement  of  the estate, and shall be entitled to charge and receive for their services  commissions  upon  all  sums  of  money  coming  to  their hands and accounted for by them, as follows: For the first thousand pesos, at the rate of seven per centum; for all above  that  sum  and  not  exceeding  ten  thousand  pesos,  at the rate  of five per centum; and for all above  that sum, at the rate of four per centum: Provided, however, That if the person  acting  as  assignee  was  receiver  of  the  property  of the   estate   pending   the   election   of   an   assignee,   any compensation   allowed   him   as   such   receiver   shall   be deducted  from  the  compensation  to  which  he  otherwise would  be  entitled  as  such  assignee:  And  provided  further, further  That  if  there  should  be  two  or  more  assignees  the court shall order an equitable division of the compensation herein provided, and if for any reason an assignee's term is completed  before  the  final  settlement  of  the  estate  and  a successor is appointed the court shall not allow to any such assignee  prior  to  the  settlement  of  the  estate  an  amount exceeding  four  per  centum  of  the  sums  of  money  coming into  his  hands.  Upon  the  final  settlement  of  the  estate  an equitable distribution of the compensation of the assignees shall be made.

SECTION    43.       Filing    of    accounts    with    vouchers, statements, etc.; Decisions of court upon claims; Additional accounts.  —  At  the  expiration  of  three  months  from  the appointment of the assignee in any case, or as much earlier as the court may direct, a time and place shall be fixed by the  court  at  which  the  assignee  shall  file  just  and  true accounts  of  all  his  receipts  and  payments  with  proper vouchers,  verified  by  his  oath  and  a  statement  of  the property    outstanding,    specifying    the    causes    of    its outstanding,    also    what    debts    or    claims    are    yet undetermined,   and   stating   what   sum   remains   in   his possession, and shall accompany the same with an affidavit that notice by registered mail has been given to all creditors named  in  the  schedule  filed  by  the  debtor  or  the  assignee that said accounts will be heard at a time specified in such notice, which time shall not be less than two nor more than eight weeks from the filing of such accounts. At the hearing the court shall audit the accounts of the assignee, and any person  interested  may  appear  and  file  exceptions  thereto and  contest  the  same.  The  court  shall  thereupon  confirm said accounts if they shall be found to be correct, or order the  same  corrected  if  errors  shall  be  found  therein.  The court  shall  also,  in  such  hearing,  determine  the  property which  must  be  deducted  from  the  estate  as  another's, under  the  provisions  of section forty-eight of this Act, and the right of the claimants to participate in the dividend, and may order a dividend paid to those creditors whose claims have  been  proven  and  allowed.  The  decision  of  the  courttheretofore   rendered  as  to  whether  any  claimant   was entitled to vote for an assignee shall not be conclusive upon the right  of the claimant to  share in such dividend; but all claimants who  were so allowed  to  vote shall participate in such dividend unless objections were filed to the same prior to  such  hearing.  If  any  such  objections  have  been  filed against any claim, or if any claimant was refused the right to  vote,  the  court  shall  determine  said  objections  and  the rights  of  all  such  claimants  in  such  hearing  and  refuse  or allow   the   same   before   the   declaration   of   a   dividend. Thereafter,  further  accounts,  statements,  and  dividends shall be made in like manner as often as occasion requires: Provided, however, That it shall be the duty of the assignee to file his final account within one year from the date of the order  of  adjudication,  unless  the  court,  after  notice  to creditors,  shall  grant  further  time,  upon  a  satisfactory showing  that  great  loss  and  waste  would  result  to  the estate  by  reason  of  the  conversion  of  the  property  into money within said time, or that it has been impossible to do so by reason of litigation.

52

Page 53: SUMMARY - Salescredit

SECTION 44.    Motion to require accounts, filing of . — The court may at any time, upon the motion of any two or more creditors,  require  the  assignee  to  file  his  account  in  the manner   and   upon   giving   the   notice   specified   in   the preceding   section,   and   if   he   has   funds   subject   to distribution he may be required to distribute them  without delay.

SECTION 45.    Rights of creditors late in proving claims. — Whenever   any   dividend   has   been   duly   declared,   the distribution of it shall not be stayed or affected by reason of debts being subsequently  proved, but any creditor  proving such  a  debt  shall  be  entitled  to  a  dividend  equal  to  those already  received  by  the  other  creditors  before  any  further dividend  is  made  to  the  latter,  if  the  failure  to  prove  such claim   shall   not   have   resulted   from   his   own   neglect.

SECTION  46.     Failure,  neglect  or  refusal  by  assignee.  — Should   the   assignee   refuse   or   neglect   to   render   his accounts as required by sections forty-three and forty-four of this Act, or refuse or neglect to pay over a dividend when he  shall  have,  in  the  opinion  of  the  court,  sufficient  funds for that purpose, or shall neglect or  mismanage the estate in any manner whatever or violate any of the provisions of this   Act,   the   court   shall   immediately   discharge   such assignee  from  his  trust,  and  shall  appoint  another  in  his place.  The  assignee  so  discharged  shall  forthwith  deliver over  to  the  assignee  appointed  by  the  court  all  the  funds, property,  books,  vouchers,  or  securities  belonging  to  the insolvent, and he shall not be entitled for his services to the compensation       provided       in       section       forty-two.

SECTION   47.      Final   account.   —   Preparatory   to   the settlement  of  the  estate,  the  assignee  shall  file  his  final account  in  the  court,  accompanying  the  same  with  an affidavit that a notice by registered mail has been given to all  creditors  who  have  proved  their  claims,  that  he  will apply  for  a  settlement  of  his  account  and  for  a  discharge from  all  liability  as  assignee  at  a  time  specified  in  such notice, which time shall not be less than two nor more than eight weeks from such filing. At the hearing the court shall audit  the  account,  and  any  person  interested  may  appear and  file  exceptions  in  writing  and contest  the  same.  The court  thereupon  shall  settle  the  account,  and  order  a dividend  of  any  portion  of  the  estate,  if  any,  remaining undistributed,  and  shall  discharge  the  assignee,  subject  to compliance with the order of the court, from all liability as assignee to any creditor of the insolvent.

CONCURRENCE AND PREFERENCE OF CREDITS (ARTICLES 2236-2251)  

CONCURRENCE OF CREDITS      Implies  the  possession  by  two  or  more  creditors  of  equal rights  or  privileges  over  the  same  property  or  all  the property of a debtor  

PREFERENCE OF CREDIT - Right held by a creditor to be preferred in the payment of his claim above others out of the debtor’s assets  NATURE AND EFFECT OF PREFERENCE

1.   A  preference  is  an  exception  to  the  general  rule.    For  this reason, the law as to preferences is strictly construed. 2.   Preference  doesn’t  create  an  interest  in  property.    it  creates simply  a right of  one  creditor to  be paid  first the proceeds  of the sale of property as against another creditor. 3.   The law doesn’t give the creditor who has a preference a right to take the property or sell it as against another creditor.  It is not a question who takes or sells, it is one of the application of the proceeds after the sale—of payment of the debt 4.   The  right  of  preference  is  one  which  can  be  made  only  by being  asserted  and  maintained.    If  the  right  claimed  is  not asserted or maintained, it is lost. 5.   Where  a  creditor  released  his  levy,  leaving  the  property  in possession  of  the  debtor,  thereby 

53

Page 54: SUMMARY - Salescredit

indicating  that  he  didn’t intend  to  press  his  claim  further  as  to  that  specific  property, after that act, his claim to preference, if one had been asserted y him, could not exist because he had ceased to contest.  

WHEN RULE OF PREFERENCE APPLICABLE

    Apply only where two or more creditors have separate and distinct  claims  against  the  same  debtor  who  has  an insufficient property      Is  applicable  when  the  debtor  is  insolvent—having  more liabilities than his assets     It  is  a  matter  of  necessity  and  log  that  the  question  of preference should arise only when the debtor’s assets are insufficient to pay his debts in full 

GENERAL PROVISIONS   Art. 2236. The debtor is liable with all his property, present and future, for the fulfillment of  his obligations, subject to the exemptions provided by law. (1911a)  AS A RULE, A DEBTOR IS LIABLE WITH ALL HIS PROPERTY, PRESENT  AND  FUTURE,  FOR  THE  FULFILLMENT  OF  HIS OBLIGATIONS  EXEMPT PROPERTY 1.   Present  property-Articles  152,  153,  154,  155,  205(Family Code);  Section  13  Rule  39  of  the  Rules  of  Court;  Section 118 of CA 141  Art. 152. The family home, constituted jointly by the husband and  the  wife  or  by  an  unmarried  head  of  a  family,  is  the dwelling  house  where  they  and  their  family  reside,  and  the land on which it is situated. (223a)

Art. 153. The family  home is deemed constituted  on  a  house and lot from the time it is occupied as a family residence. From the  time  of  its  constitution  and  so  long  as  any  of  its beneficiaries   actually   resides   therein,   the   family   home continues to be such and is exempt from execution, forced sale  or attachment except as hereinafter provided and to the extent of the value allowed by law. (223a) Art. 154. The beneficiaries of a family home are: (1) The husband and wife, or an unmarried person who is the head of a family; (2)  Their  parents,  ascendants,  descendants,  brothers  and sisters,  whether  the  relationship  be  legitimate  or  illegitimate, who  are  living  in  the  family  home  and  who  depend  upon  the head of the family for legal support. (226a) Art.  155.  The  family  home  shall  be  exempt  from  execution, forced sale or attachment except: (1) For nonpayment of taxes; (2)  For  debts  incurred  prior  to  the  constitution  of  the  family home; (3) For debts secured by mortgages on the premises before or after such constitution; and (4) For debts due to laborers, mechanics, architects, builders, materialmen   and   others   who   have   rendered   service   or furnished material for the construction of the building. (243a) Art. 205. The right to receive support  under this Title as well as  any  money  or property  obtained  as  such support shall  not be levied upon on attachment or execution. (302a) Sec. 13. Property exempt from execution. Except  as  otherwise  expressly  provided  by  law,  the  following property, and no other, shall be exempt from execution: (a) The judgment obligor's family home as provided by law, or the homestead in which he resides, and land necessarily used in connection therewith; (b)  Ordinary  tools  and  implements  personally  used  by  him  in his trade, employment, or livelihood; (c)  Three  horses,  or  three  cows,  or  three  carabaos,  or  other beasts  of  burden  such  as  the  judgment  obligor  may  select necessarily used by him in his ordinary occupation; (d)  His  necessary  clothing  and  articles  for  ordinary  personal use, excluding jewelry;

54

Page 55: SUMMARY - Salescredit

(e)    Household    furniture    and    utensils    necessary    for housekeeping,  and  used  for  that  purpose  by  the  judgment obligor  and  his  family,  such  as  the  judgment  obligor  may select, of a value not exceeding one hundred thousand pesos; (f)  Provisions  for  individual  or  family  use  sufficient  for  four months; (g)   The   professional   libraries   and   equipment   of   judges, lawyers,    physicians,    pharmacists,    dentists,    engineers, surveyors,  clergymen,  teachers,  and  other  professionals,  not exceeding three hundred thousand pesos in value; (h)  One  fishing  boat  and  accessories  not  exceeding  the  total value  of  one  hundred  thousand  pesos  owned  by  a  fisherman and by the lawful use of which he earns his livelihood; (i)  So  much  of  the  salaries,  wages,  or  earnings  of  the judgment  obligor  of  his  personal  services  within  the  four months preceding the levy as are necessary for the support of his family; (j) Lettered gravestones; (k) Monies benefits, privileges, or annuities accruing or in any manner growing out of any life insurance; (l)  The  right  to  receive  legal  support,  or  money  or  property obtained as such support, or any pension or gratuity from the Government; (m) Properties specially exempt by law. But  no article or  species  of  property  mentioned in  his section shall  be  exempt  from  execution  issued  upon  a  judgment recovered for its price or upon a judgment of foreclosure of a mortgage thereon. 2.   Future  property—those  related  to  the  insolvency  of  a debtor 3.   Property in custodia legis and of public dominion Art.  2237.  Insolvency  shall  be  governed  by  special  laws insofar as they are not inconsistent with this Code. (n)  

>>INSOLVENCY LAW WILL COME INTO PLAY AFTER THE RULES OF PREFERENCE AND CONCURRENCE OF CREDITS.  DEBTOR MUST BE THE ABSOLUTE OWNER  Art. 2238.  So long as the conjugal partnership or absolute community  subsists,  its  property  shall  not  be  among  the assets  to  be  taken  possession  of  by  the  assignee  for  the payment   of   the   insolvent   debtor's   obligations,   except insofar  as  the  latter  have  redounded  to  the  benefit  of  the family.   If   it   is   the   husband   who   is   insolvent,   the administration   of   the   conjugal   partnership   of   absolute community may, by order of the court, be transferred to the wife or to a third person other than the assignee. (n)  Art. 2239. If there is property, other than that mentioned in the  preceding  article,  owned  by  two  or  more  persons,  one of  whom  is  the  insolvent  debtor,  his  undivided  share  or interest  therein  shall  be  among  the  assets  to  be  taken possession  of  by  the  assignee  for  the  payment  of  the insolvent debtor's obligations. (n)  RULES  INVOLVING  UNDIVIDED  SHARE  OR  INTEREST  OF  A CO-OWNER

     If  there  is  a  co-ownership  and  of  the  co-owners  is  the insolvent  debtor,  his  undivided  share  or  interest  in  the property shall be possessed by the assignee in insolvency proceedings because it is part of his assets       The  shares  of  the  other  co-owners  of  course  cannot  be taken possession of by the assignee  Art.  2240.  Property  held  by  the  insolvent  debtor  as  a trustee  of  an  express  or  implied  trust,  shall  be  excluded from the insolvency proceedings. (n)  

RULE INVOLVING PROPERTY HELD IN TRUST

55

Page 56: SUMMARY - Salescredit

     The trustee is not strictly speaking the owner of the trust property although he has legal title thereto      Hence,  property  held  in  trust  by  the  insolvent  debtor should be excluded from the insolvency proceedings 

CLASSIFICATION OF CREDITS   Art.  2241.  With  reference  to  specific  movable  property  of the debtor, the following claims or liens shall be preferred:        (1)  Duties,  taxes  and  fees  due  thereon  to  the  State  or any subdivision thereof;        (2)  Claims  arising  from  misappropriation,  breach  of trust,  or  malfeasance  by  public  officials  committed  in  the performance  of  their  duties,  on  the  movables,  money  or securities obtained by them;        (3) Claims for the unpaid price of movables sold, on said movables,  so  long  as  they  are  in  the  possession  of  the debtor, up to the value of the same; and if the movable has been resold by the debtor and the price is still unpaid, the lien may be enforced  on the price; this right is not lost by the  immobilization  of  the  thing  by  destination,  provided  it has not lost its form, substance and identity; neither is the right  lost  by  the  sale  of  the  thing  together  with  other property  for  a  lump  sum,  when  the  price  thereof  can  be determined proportionally;        (4)  Credits  guaranteed  with  a  pledge  so  long  as  the things  pledged  are  in  the  hands  of  the  creditor,  or  those guaranteed by a chattel mortgage, upon the things pledged or mortgaged, up to the value thereof;        (5)   Credits   for   the   making,   repair,   safekeeping   or preservation  of  personal  property,  on  the  movable  thus made, repaired, kept or possessed;        (6)    Claims    for    laborers'    wages,    on    the    goods manufactured or the work done;        (7) For expenses of salvage, upon the goods salvaged;        (8) Credits between the landlord and the tenant, arising from  the  contract  of  tenancy  on  shares,  on  the  share  of each in the fruits or harvest;        (9)  Credits  for  transportation,  upon  the  goods  carried, for  the  price  of the contract and incidental expenses,  until their delivery and for thirty days thereafter;        (10)  Credits  for  lodging  and  supplies  usually  furnished to travelers by hotelkeepers, on the movables belonging to the guest as long as such movables are in the hotel, but not for money loaned to the guests;        (11) Credits for seeds and expenses for cultivation and harvest advanced to the debtor, upon the fruits harvested;        (12)  Credits  for  rent  for  one  year,  upon  the  personal property of the lessee existing on the immovable leased and on the fruits of the same, but not on money or instruments of credit;        (13)  Claims  in  favor  of  the  depositor  if  the  depositary has  wrongfully  sold  the  thing  deposited,  upon  the  price  of the sale.        In the foregoing cases, if the movables to which the lien or  preference  attaches  have  been  wrongfully  taken,  the  creditor  may  demand  them  from  any  possessor,  within thirty days from the unlawful seizure. (1922a)  GENERAL CATEGORIES OF CREDIT

56

Page 57: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   Special preferred credits listed in Articles 2241 and 2242 2.   Ordinary preferred credits listed in Article 2244 3.   Common credits under Article 2245  

PREFERRED    CREDITS    WITH    RESPECT    TO    SPECIFIC MOVABLE PROPERTY

1.   Duties,  taxes  and  fees  due  thereon  to  the  State  or  any subdivision thereof 2.   Claims  arising  from  misappropriation,  breach  of  trust,  or malfeasance    by    public    officials    committed    in    the performance  of  their  duties,  on  the  movables,  money  or securities obtained by them 3.   Claims  for  the  unpaid  price  of  movables  sold,  on  said movables,  so  long  as  they  are  in  the  possession  of  the debtor,  up  to  the  value  of  the  same;  and  if  the  movable has been resold by the debtor and the price is still unpaid, the lien may be enforced on the price; this right is not lost by the immobilization of the thing by destination, provided it has not lost its form,  substance and identity;  neither is the right lost by the sale  of the thing together  with other property  for  a  lump  sum,  when  the  price  thereof  can  be determined proportionally  4.   Credits  guaranteed  with  a  pledge  so  long  as  the  things pledged  are  in  the  hands  of  the  creditor,  or  those guaranteed   by   a   chattel   mortgage,   upon   the   things pledged or mortgaged, up to the value thereofa.    Should be registered b.   Binding against third parties 5.   Credits for the making, repair, safekeeping or preservation of personal property, on the movable thus made, repaired, kept or possessed 6.   Claims for laborers' wages, on the goods manufactured or the work done 7.   For expenses of salvage, upon the goods salvaged 8.   Credits between the landlord and the tenant, arising from the contract of tenancy on shares, on the share of each in the fruits or harvest 9.   Credits for transportation, upon the goods carried, for the price  of  the  contract  and  incidental  expenses,  until  their delivery and for thirty days thereafter 10. Credits  for  lodging  and  supplies  usually  furnished  to travelers  by  hotel  keepers,  on  the  movables  belonging  to the  guest  as  long  as  such  movables  are  in  the  hotel,  but not for money loaned to the guests 11. Credits for seeds and expenses for cultivation and harvest advanced to the debtor, upon the fruits harvested 12. Credits for rent for one year, upon the personal property of the  lessee  existing  on  the  immovable  leased  and  on  the fruits  of  the  same,  but  not  on  money  or  instruments  of credit 13. Claims  in  favor  of  the  depositor  if  the  depositary  has wrongfully sold the thing deposited, upon the price  of the sale.  

PREFERRED    CREDITS    WITH    RESPECT    TO    SPECIFIC MOVABLE PROPERTY

     Articles 2241 and 2242 don’t give the order of preference or priority of payment      They merely enumerate the credits which enjoy preference with respect to specific movables or immovables      With respect to the same  specific movable or immovable, creditors with the exception of the State, merely concur      REMEMBER  that  preference  is  only  given  to  #1  and  the rest shall be treated equally  

WRONGFUL   TAKING   OF   MOVABLES   TO   WHICH   LIEN ATTACHES

    Last paragraph applies only when the right of ownership in such  property  continues  in  the  debtor,  and  therefore,  is not  applicable  to  cases  where  the  debtor  has  parted  his ownership therein, as where he has sold the property Art.  2242.  With  reference  to  specific  immovable  property and   real   rights   of   the   debtor,   the   following   claims, mortgages and liens shall be preferred, and shall constitute an encumbrance on the immovable or real right:

57

Page 58: SUMMARY - Salescredit

       (1) Taxes due upon the land or building;        (2) For the unpaid price of real property sold, upon the immovable sold;        (3)  Claims  of  laborers,  masons,  mechanics  and  other workmen,   as    well   as   of   architects,   engineers   and contractors, engaged in the construction, reconstruction or repair  of  buildings,   canals   or  other   works,  upon   said buildings, canals or other works;        (4)   Claims   of   furnishers   of   materials   used   in   the construction,  reconstruction,  or  repair  of  buildings,  canals or other works, upon said buildings, canals or other works;        (5)   Mortgage   credits   recorded   in   the   Registry   of Property, upon the real estate mortgaged;        (6)  Expenses  for  the  preservation  or  improvement  of real  property  when  the  law  authorizes  reimbursement, upon the immovable preserved or improved;        (7)  Credits  annotated  in  the  Registry  of  Property,  in virtue  of  a  judicial  order,  by  attachments  or  executions, upon the property affected, and only as to later credits;        (8) Claims of co-heirs for warranty in the partition of an immovable   among   them,   upon   the   real   property   thus divided;        (9)  Claims  of  donors  or  real  property  for  pecuniary charges or other conditions imposed upon the donee, upon the immovable donated;        (10) Credits of insurers, upon the property insured, for the insurance premium for two years. (1923a) 

PREFERRED LIEN ON SPECIFIC IMMOVABLE PROPERTY

1.   Taxes due upon the land or building 2.   For  the  unpaid  price  of  real  property  sold,  upon  the immovable sold 3.   Claims   of   laborers,   masons,   mechanics   and   other workmen,   as   well   as   of   architects,   engineers   and ontractors, engaged in the construction, reconstruction or repair  of  buildings,  canals  or  other  works,  upon  said buildings, canals or other works  4.   Claims of furnishers of materials used in the construction, reconstruction,  or  repair  of  buildings,  canals  or  other works, upon said buildings, canals or other works  5.   Mortgage  credits  recorded  in  the  Registry  of  Property, upon the real estate mortgaged 6.   Expenses  for  the  preservation  or  improvement  of  real property  when  the  law  authorizes  reimbursement,  upon the immovable preserved or improved  7.   Credits annotated in the Registry of Property, in virtue of a judicial  order,  by  attachments  or  executions,  upon  the property affected, and only as to later credits 8.   Claims  of  co-heirs  for  warranty  in  the  partition  of  an immovable  among  them,  upon  the  real  property  thus divided 9.   Claims of donors or real property for pecuniary charges or other  conditions  imposed  upon  the  donee,  upon  the immovable donated 10. Credits  of  insurers,  upon  the  property  insured,  for  the insurance premium for two years. 

Art.  2243.  The  claims  or  credits  enumerated  in  the  two preceding  articles  shall  be  considered  as  mortgages  or pledges  of  real  or  personal  property,  or  liens  within  the purview  of  legal  provisions  governing  insolvency.  Taxes mentioned  in  No.  1,  Article  2241,  and  No.  1,  Article  2242, shall first be satisfied. (n)  

NATURE  OF  CLAIMS  OR  CREDITS  IN  ARTICLES  2241  AND 2242

58

Page 59: SUMMARY - Salescredit

     Articles  2241  and  2242  apply  only  when  there  is  a concurrence of credits when the same specific property of the  debtor  is  subjected  to  the  claims  of  several  creditors and the value of such property is insufficient to pay in full all the creditors      In  such  situation,  the  question  of  preference  will  arise, there  will  be  a  need  to  determine  which  of  the  creditors will be paid ahead of the others  Art.  2244.  With  reference  to  other  property,  real  and personal, of the debtor, the following claims or credits shall be preferred in the order named:        (1) Proper funeral expenses for the debtor, or children under his or her parental authority who have no property of their own, when approved by the court;        (2)   Credits   for   services   rendered   the   insolvent   by employees,  laborers,  or  household  helpers  for  one  year preceding   the   commencement   of   the   proceedings   in insolvency;        (3) Expenses during  the last illness  of the  debtor  or  of his  or  her  spouse  and  children  under  his  or  her  parental authority, if they have no property of their own;        (4) Compensation due the laborers or their dependents under laws providing for indemnity for damages in cases of labor  accident,  or  illness  resulting  from  the  nature  of  the employment;        (5)  Credits  and  advancements  made  to  the  debtor  for support  of  himself  or  herself,  and  family,  during  the  last year preceding the insolvency;        (6) Support during the insolvency  proceedings, and for three months thereafter;        (7)   Fines   and   civil   indemnification   arising   from   a criminal offense;        (8)   Legal   expenses,   and   expenses   incurred   in   the administration  of  the  insolvent's  estate  for  the  common  interest  of  the  creditors,  when  properly  authorized  and approved by the court;        (9)    Taxes    and    assessments    due    the    national government,  other  than  those  mentioned  in  Articles  2241, No. 1, and 2242, No. 1;        (10)  Taxes  and  assessments  due  any  province,  other than those referred to in Articles 2241, No. 1, and 2242, No. 1;        (11)    Taxes    and    assessments    due    any    city    or municipality,  other  than  those  indicated  in  Articles  2241, No. 1, and 2242, No. 1;        (12) Damages for death or personal injuries caused by a quasi-delict;        (13)  Gifts  due  to  public  and  private  institutions  of charity or beneficence;        (14) Credits which,  without special privilege, appear in(a) a public instrument;  or (b) in a final judgment, if they have been the subject of litigation. These credits shall have preference among themselves in the order of priority of the dates    of    the    instruments    and    of    the    judgments, respectively. (1924a)  

SPECIAL PREFERRED CREDITS

1.   Proper  funeral  expenses  for  the  debtor,  or  children  under his or her parental authority who have no property of their own, when approved by the court 2.   Credits for  services rendered the insolvent by employees, laborers,  or household helpers for  one year preceding the commencement of the proceedings in insolvency 3.   Expenses during the last illness  of the debtor  or of  his or her   spouse   and   children   under   his   or  

59

Page 60: SUMMARY - Salescredit

her   parental authority, if they have no property of their own 4.   Compensation due the laborers or their dependents under laws providing for indemnity for damages in cases of labor accident,  or  illness  resulting  from  the  nature  of  the employment 5.   Credits and advancements made to the debtor for support of  himself  or  herself,  and  family,  during  the  last  year preceding the insolvency  6.   Support  during  the  insolvency  proceedings,  and  for  three months thereafter 7.   Fines  and  civil  indemnification  arising  from  a  criminal offense 8.   Legal    expenses,    and    expenses    incurred    in    the administration  of  the  insolvent's  estate  for  the  common interest  of  the  creditors,  when  properly  authorized  and approved by the court 9.   Taxes  and  assessments  due  the  national  government, other  than  those  mentioned  in  Articles  2241,  No.  1,  and 2242,   No.   1   (10)   Taxes   and   assessments   due   any province, other than those referred to in Articles 2241, No. 1, and 2242, No. 1  10. Taxes and assessments due any city or municipality, other than those indicated in Articles 2241, No. 1, and 2242, No. 1 11. Damages for death or personal injuries caused by a quasi-delict 12. Gifts  due  to  public  and  private  institutions  of  charity  or beneficence  13. Credits which, without special privilege, appear in  a.  public instrument; or  b.   in a final judgment, if they have been the subject of litigation.  These credits shall have preference among themselves in the order of priority of the dates of the instruments and of the judgments, respectively.

ORDER OF PRIORITY ONLY WITH RESPECT TO INSOLVENT’S FREE PROPERTY

1.   Specially  preferred  credits—credits  which  are  specially preferred  because  they  constitute  liens  take  precedence over  ordinary  preferred  credits  so  far  as  concerns  the property to which the liens are attached a.    Specific property involved of greater value b.   Specific  property  involved  of  lesser  value—will  be treated as ordinary preferred credits and to be paid in the order of preference therein provided 2.   Ordinary   preferred   credits—only   in   respect   of   the insolvent’s   free   property,   is   an   order   of   priority established.      In   this   sequence,   certain   taxes   and assessments also figure but, as already pointed out, these don’t have the same kind of overriding preference  Art. 2245. Credits of any other kind or class, or by any other right  or  title  not  comprised  in  the  four  preceding  articles, shall enjoy no preference. (1925)  

NON-PREFERRED OR COMMON CREDITS - Credits  other  than  those  mentioned  in  2241,  2242,  and 2244 shall enjoy  no preference and such common  credits shall be paid pro rata regardless of dates   ORDER OF PREFERENCE OF CREDITS   Art.   2246.   Those   credits   which   enjoy   preference   with respect  to  specific  movables,  exclude  all  others  to  the extent  of  the  value  of  the  personal  property  to  which  the preference refers.  Art. 2247. If there are two or more credits with respect to the same specific movable property, they shall be satisfied pro  rata,  after  the  payment  of  duties,  taxes  and  fees  due the State or any subdivision thereof. (1926a)  Art. 2248. Those credits which enjoy preference in relation to specific real property or real rights, exclude all others to the  extent  of  the  value  of  the  immovable  or  real  right  to which the preference refers.  Art. 2249. If there are two or more credits with respect to the same specific real property or real rights, they shall be satisfied  pro  rata,  after  the  payment  of  the  taxes  and assessments  upon  the  immovable  property  or  real  right. (1927a)  

60

Page 61: SUMMARY - Salescredit

Art.  2250.  The  excess,  if  any,  after  the  payment  of  the credits  which  enjoy  preference  with  respect  to  specific property,  real  or  personal,  shall  be  added  to  the  free property which the debtor may have, for the payment of the other credits. (1928a)  TWO-TIER ORDER OF PREFERENCE

     First  tier  includes  only  taxes,  duties  and  fees  due  on  a specific movable or immovable property      All other special preferred credits stand on the second tier to be satisfied pari passu and pro rata, out of the residual value  of  the  specific  property  to  which  such  other  credits relate      The   pro-rata   rule   however   doesn’t   apply   to   credits annotated  in  the  RD  in  virtue  of  a  judicial  order,  by attachments  and  executions,  which  are  preferred  to  later credits.      In   satisfying   several   credits   annotated   by attachments  and  executions,  the  rule  is  still  preference according to the priority of credits in the order of time.  

PROCEEDING  FOR  PAYMENT  PRO  RATA  OF  PREFERRED CREDITORS

     Proceeding required for adjudication of claims of preferred creditors      Pro rata rule contemplates more than one creditor 

Art. 2251. Those credits which do not enjoy any preference with  respect  to  specific  property,  and  those  which  enjoy preference,  as  to  the  amount  not  paid,  shall  be  satisfied according to the following rules:  (1) In the order established in Article 2244;  (2) Common credits referred to in Article 2245 shall be paid pro rata regardless of dates. (1929a)  

SUMMARY AS TO ORDER OF PREFERENCE

1.   Preferred lien on specific immovables 2.   Preferred lien on specific movables 3.   Special preferred credits 4.   Distribute pro-rata to creditors without preference

RIGHT OF THIRD PERSON TO SATISFY OBLIGATION

Art.   2116.  After  the  public  auction,  the  pledgee  shall promptly advise the pledgor or owner of the result thereof.  (n)  Art.  2117. Any third person  who  has any right in or to the thing  pledged  may  satisfy  the  principal  obligation  as  soon as the latter becomes due and demandable.(n) >  A third person  who  has a right in  or to the thing pledged may  pay  the  debt  as  soon  as  it  becomes  due  and demandable  and  the  creditor  cannot  refuse  to  accept  the payment

RIGHT OF PLEDGEE TO COLLECT AND RECEIVE AMOUNT DUE ON CREDIT PLEDGED

Art. 2118. If a credit which has been pledged becomes due before it is redeemed, the pledgee may collect and receive the amount due. He shall apply the same to the payment of his  claim,  and  deliver  the  surplus,  should  there  be  any,  to the pledgor. (n) > Pledgee  is  given  the  right  to  collect  and  receive  the amount due on the credit pledged > But in reference to the previous article, having the duty to take  good  care  with  the  diligence  of  a  good  father  to  a family  the  thing  pledged,  he  has  the  duty  to  collect  if danger would endanger the recovery of the credit

61

Page 62: SUMMARY - Salescredit

Art.  2119.  If  two  or  more  things  are  pledged,  the  pledgee may choose which he will cause to be sold, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. He may demand the sale of only as many of the things as are necessary for the payment of the debt. (n)  

RIGHT   OF   PLEDGEE   TO   CHOOSE   WHICH   OF   SEVERAL THINGS PLEDGED SHALL BE SOLD

> After  sufficient  property  has  been  sold  to  satisfy  the obligation  plus  interests  and  expenses,  no  more  shall  be sold  Art. 2120. If a third party secures an obligation by pledging his  own  movable  property  under  the  provisions  of  Article 2085  he  shall  have  the  same  rights  as  a  guarantor  under Articles 2066 to 2070, and Articles 2077 to 2081. He is not prejudiced  by  any  waiver   of  defense  by  the  principal obligor. (n)  

RIGHT OF THIRD PERSON WHO PLEDGED HIS OWN PROPERTY

>  A third person who is not a party to the principal obligation may secure the latter by pledging his own property >  The law grants him the same rights as a guarantor and he cannot  be  prejudiced  by  any  waiver  or  defense  by  the principal debtor  Art.  2121.  Pledges  created  by  operation  of  law,  such  as those  referred  to  in  Articles  546,  1731,  and  1994,  are governed by the foregoing articles  on the possession, care and  sale  of  the  thing  as  well  as  on  the  termination  of  the pledge. However, after payment  of the debt and expenses, the remainder of the price of the sale shall be delivered to the obligor. (n)  Art. 2122. A thing under a pledge by operation of law may be sold only after demand of the amount for which the thing is  retained.  The  public  auction  shall  take  place  within  one month  after  such  demand.  If,  without  just  grounds,  the creditor  does  not  cause  the  public  sale  to  be  held  within such period, the debtor may require the return of the thing. (n)  Art.    2123.    With    regard    to    pawnshops    and    other establishments, which are engaged in making loans secured by  pledges,  the  special  laws  and  regulations  concerning them shall be  observed, and  subsidiarily, the  provisions  of his Title. (1873a)

MORTGAGE REAL ESTATE MORTGAGE (ARTICLES 2124-2131)

Art. 2124. Only the following property may be the object of a contract of mortgage:        (1) Immovables;        (2)  Alienable  real  rights  in  accordance  with  the  laws, imposed upon immovables.  Nevertheless,  movables  may  be  the  object  of  a  chattel mortgage. (1874a)  

MORTGAGE

> Contract  whereby  the  debtor  secures  to  the  creditor  the fulfillment of a principal obligation, specially substituting to such  security  immovable  property  or  real  rights  over immovable property which obligation shall be satisfied with the proceeds of sale of said property or rights in case the said obligation is not complied with at the time stipulated > Real, accessory, unilateral and subsidiary contract  

POSSESSION OF PROPERTY MORTGAGED

62

Page 63: SUMMARY - Salescredit

> As a general rule, it is retained by the mortgagor > The mortgaged property is only subjected to a lien by the mortgagee but ownership is retained by the mortgagor  

PAYMENT OF INTEREST ON MORTGAGE CREDIT

> With  regard  to  fruits  or  interest,  the  mortgagee  shall  be subject to the obligation of an antichresis creditor  

SUBJECT MATTER OF MORTGAGE

> Immovables and alienable real rights over immovables  

FUTURE PROPERTY CANNOT BE OBJECT OF MORTGAGE

> Future  property  cannot  be  the  object  of  a  contract  of mortgage > A   stipulation   however   subjecting   the   mortgage   lien, properties which the mortgagor may subsequently acquire, install,  or  use  in  connection  with  real  property  already mortgaged belonging to the mortgagor is valid  Art.  2125.  In  addition  to  the  requisites  stated  in  Article 2085, it is indispensable, in  order that a mortgage may be validly  constituted,  that  the  document  in  which  it  appears be recorded in the Registry of Property. If the instrument is not   recorded,   the   mortgage   is   nevertheless   binding between the parties.  The persons in whose favor the law establishes a mortgage have  no  other  right than to demand the execution and the recording   of   the   document   in   which   the   mortgage   is formalized. (1875a)  

ESSENTIAL REQUISITES OF A MORTGAGE

1.   To secure the fulfillment of a principal obligation 2.   The  mortgagor  should  be  the  absolute  owner  of  thing mortgaged 3.   The mortgagor should have free disposal of the thing 4.   When  the  principal  obligation  becomes  due,  the  thing mortgaged may be alienated to secure payment 5.   For a mortgage to  be validly  constituted  and to prejudice third  persons,  the  mortgage  should  be  recorded  with  the Registry of Property  NO  VALIDLY  CONSTITUTED  MORTGAGE  IF  THE  DEED  OF MORTGAGE IS A MERE PRIVATE DOCUMENT

MORTGAGE   IS   NEVERTHELESS   BINDING   BETWEEN   THE PARTIES EVEN IF UNREGISTERED

> Actual knowledge on the part of the buyer > Actual knowledge=registration  

PROCEDURE:  WHAT  HAPPENS  WHEN  YOU  ENTER  INTO  A CONTRACT OF MORTGAGE? 

1.   Execute the document of mortgage  2.   Go to a notary public, who will notarize the document.  3.   Pay the documentary stamp tax within the first five days of the succeeding month.  The doc stamp tax is a percentage of the value of the property mortgaged. 

63

Page 64: SUMMARY - Salescredit

4.   Go  to  the  Office  of  the  Register  of  Deeds  and  pay  the registration fees.  Before you pay the registration fees, the government  will  require  you  to  update  payment  of  realty taxes  on  the  property.    After  payment  of  the  registration fees, the mortgage will be annotated on the title.  

EFFECT   OF   INVALIDITY   OF   MORTGAGE   ON   PRINCIPAL OBLIGATION

1.   The principal obligation remains valid 2.   Mortgage deed remains as evidence of principal obligation Art. 2126. The mortgage directly and immediately subjects the   property   upon   which   it   is   imposed,   whoever   the possessor  may  be,  to  the  fulfillment  of  the  obligation  for whose security it was constituted. (1876)  

EFFECTS OF MORTGAGE

1.   Creates a real right a.    If  the  mortgagor  sells  the  encumbered  property, the  property  remains  subject  to  the  fulfillment  of the principal obligation secured by it b.   The mortgagee has a right to rely in good faith on what  appears  on  the  certificate  of  title  of  the mortgagor of the property given as security and in the  absence  of  anything  to  excite  suspicion,  he  is under no obligation to look beyond the certificate  c.    Until   the   action   for   expropriation   has   been completed,  ownership  over  the  property  remains with the registered owner d.   Banking  institution  must  exercise  due  diligence before entering contract of mortgage e.    If a person is the first mortgagee over a property which  was  sold  in  an  auction  by  the  second mortgagee,  the  only  right  left  to  him  is  to  collect  his  mortgage  credit  from  the  purchaser  thereof during the sale conducted f.    In  a  suit  to  nullify  a  certificate  of  title,  the mortgagee is an indispensable party 2.   Creates merely an encumbrance  Art. 2127. The mortgage extends to the natural accessions, to  the  improvements,  growing  fruits,  and  the  rents  or income not yet received when the obligation becomes due, and to the amount of the indemnity granted or owing to the proprietor from the insurers of the property mortgaged, or in   virtue   of   expropriation   for   public   use,   with   the declarations,  amplifications  and  limitations  established  by law,  whether  the  estate  remains  in  the  possession  of  the mortgagor,  or  it  passes  into  the  hands  of  a  third  person. (1877)  

EXTENT OF MORTGAGE

> A REM constituted on an immovable property is not limited to the property itself but also extends to all its accessions, improvements, growing fruits, and rents > To exclude them, it is necessary that there be an express stipulation to that effect Art.   2128.   The   mortgage   credit   may   be   alienated   or assigned  to  a  third  person,  in  whole  or  in  part,  with  the formalities required by law. (1878)  Art.  2129.  The  creditor  may  claim  from  a  third  person  in possession  of the  mortgaged property, the payment of the part of the credit secured by the property which said third person  possesses,  in  the  terms  and  with  the  formalities which the law establishes. (1879) 

RIGHT     OF     CREDITOR     AGAINST     TRANSFEREE     OF MORTGAGED PROPERTY

> The fact that the mortgagor has transferred the mortgaged property  to  a  third  person  doesn't  relieve  him  from  his obligation to pay the debt to the mortgage creditor in the absence of Novation > A recorded REM is merely an accessory contract

64

Page 65: SUMMARY - Salescredit

> The  creditor  may  only  demand  from  any  possessor  the payment  only  of  the  part  of  the  credit  secured  by  said property > Necessary  that  there  be  prior  demand  for  payment  be made on the debtor and the latter failed to pay > Does not really  apply to all third persons in possession of the property > It  only  applies  to  those  in  possession  of  the  mortgaged property in the  concept of  owner.  If the possession by a third person is only as lessee, the creditor may not collect the credit from that third person.  Art.   2130.   A   stipulation   forbidding   the   owner   from alienating the immovable mortgaged shall be void. (n)  

STIPULATION  FORBIDDING  ALIENATION  OF  MORTGAGED PROPERTY

> Such   stipulation   would   be   contrary   to   public   good inasmuch  as  the  transmission  of  property  should  not  be unduly impeded  

CAN  MORTGAGEE  PROHIBIT  ENCUMBERANCES  WITHOUT PRIOR CONSENT? > Yes, regulation is not the same as prohibition > The mortgagee may even add a standard.  This is for good measure on the part of the mortgagee which is allowed by law.    IN  THE  FIRST  PLACE,  WHY  WOULD  YOU  BE  CONCERNED WITH  THE  DISPOSITION  OF  THE  PROPERTY  IF  YOU  ARE THE MORTGAGEE?

> You don't want the property to be in the hands of someone who is litigious  > As  a  means  of  monitoring  the  financial  condition  of  the mortgagor  Art.   2131.   The   form,   extent   and   consequences   of   a mortgage,  both  as  to  its  constitution,  modification  and extinguishment, and as to other matters not included in this Chapter,   shall   be   governed   by   the   provisions   of   the Mortgage Law and of the Land Registration Law. (1880a) 

FORECLOSURE of Mortgage - Redemption

FORECLOSURE

> Remedy available  to  the  mortgagee  by  which  he  subjects the mortgaged property to the satisfaction of the obligation to secure which the mortgage was given> Denotes a procedure adopted by the mortgagee to terminate the rights of the mortgagor on the property and includes the sale itself

VALIDITY AND EFFECT OF FORECLOSURE

> The  right  to  foreclose  the  mortgage  and  to  have  the property  seized  and  sold  with  a  view  to  applying  the proceeds to the payment of the principal obligation>  A mortgage contract may contain an acceleration clause—on  occasion  of  the  mortgagor’s  default,  the  whole  sum remaining unpaid automatically becomes due and payable> Essence    of    mortgage    contract—property    has    been identified  and  separated  from  a  mass  of  the  property  of the  mortgagor  to  secure  the  payment  of  a  principal obligation> Once  the  proceeds  have  been  applied  to  the  payment  of the  principal  obligation,  the  debtor  cannot  anymore  be asked to pay unless there is deficiency  

65

Page 66: SUMMARY - Salescredit

KINDS OF FORECLOSURE1.   Judicial  2.   Extrajudicial

AN  ACT  TO  AUTHORIZE  THE  MORTGAGE  OF  PRIVATE  REAL PROPERTY IN FAVOR OF ANY INDIVIDUAL, CORPORATION, OR ASSOCIATION SUBJECT TO CERTAIN CONDITIONS

Section    1.    Any    provision    of    law    to    the    contrary notwithstanding, private real property may be mortgaged in favor of any individual, corporation, or association, but the mortgagee  or  his  successor  in  interest,  if  disqualified  to acquire   or   hold   lands   of   the   public   domain   in   the Philippines,  shall  not  take  possession  of  the  mortgaged property during the existence of the mortgage and shall nottake  possession  of  the  mortgaged  property  except  after default    and    for    the    sole    purpose    of    foreclosure, receivership,  enforcement  or  other  proceedings  and  in  no case  for  a  period  of  more  than   5  years   from  actual possession and shall not bid or take part in any sale of such real  property  in  case  of  foreclosure:  Provided,  that  said mortgagee or successor in interest may take possession of said   property   after   default   in   accordance   with   the prescribed    judicial    procedures    for    foreclosure    and receivership  and  in  no  case  exceeding  5  years  from  actualpossession.

Section 2. All laws,  orders, or regulations,  or parts thereof inconsistent with the provisions of this Act, are repealed or modified accordingly.

Section 3. This Act shall take effect upon its approval.NOTES ON RA 133:

1.   You can mortgage to a foreigner.   RA 133  sanctions this.  Ownership is not equivalent to mortgage.  Nonetheless, he can    only    institute    judicial    proceedings    and    not extrajudicially  foreclose  the  mortgage.    Furthermore,  he cannot bid or take part in the sale of the real property.2.   The  foreigner  may  not  take  possession  of  the  property during the mortgage.  He could only possess the same as a lessee.3.   The foreigner may only take possession of the mortgaged property   after   default,   and   for   the   sole   purpose   of foreclosure,  enforcement  or   other  proceedings.     This should  not  exceed  the  period  of  5  years  from  actual possession.

JUDICIAL FORECLOSURE UNDER RULE 68, RULES OF COURT

1.   The mortgagee should file a petition for judicial foreclosure in the court which has jurisdiction over the area where the property is situated 2.   The court will conduct a trial.  If, after trial, the court finds merit in the petition, it  will render judgment  ordering the mortgagor/debtor to pay the obligation within a period not less  than  90  nor  more  than  120  days  from  the  finality  of judgment. 3.   Within  this  90  to  120  day  period,  the  mortgagor  has  the chance to pay the  obligation to prevent his property from being  sold.    This  is  called  the  EQUITY  OF  REDEMPTION PERIOD.   4.   If mortgagor fails to pay within the 90-120 days given to him by the court, the property shall be sold to the highest bidder at public auction to satisfy the judgment. 5.   There will be a judicial confirmation of the sale.  After the confirmation of the sale, the purchaser shall be entitled to the  possession  of  the  property,  and  all  the  rights  of  the mortgagor  with  respect  to  the  property  are  severed  or terminated.  The  equity  of  redemption  period  actually extends until the sale is confirmed.  Even after the lapse of the 90 to 120 day period, the mortgagor can still redeem the property, so long as there has been no confirmation of the sale yet.  Therefore, the equity  of redemption  can  beconsidered  as  the  right  of  the  mortgagor  to  redeem  the property BEFORE the confirmation of the sale.

a.    After  the  confirmation  of  the  sale,  the  mortgagor does  not  have  a  right  to  redeem  the  property anymore.    This  is  the  general  rule  in  judicial foreclosures – there is no right of redemption after the sale is

66

Page 67: SUMMARY - Salescredit

confirmed.

The  proceeds  of  the  sale  of  the  property  will  be  disposed as follows: a.    First,  the  costs  of  the  sale  will  be  deducted  from the price at which the property was sold b.   The amount of the principal obligation and interest will be deducted c.    The junior encumbrances will be satisfied d.   If there is still an excess, the excess will go back to the mortgagor.  In mortgage, the mortgagee DOESNOT get the excess (unlike in pledge).i.   If there is a deficiency, the mortgagee can ask  for  a  DEFICIENCY  JUDGMENT  which can  be  imposed  on  other  property  of  the mortgagor.      The   rule   on   extrajudicial foreclosure  is  different.  The  mortgagee must go to court and file another action for the collection of the deficiency.   ONE WOULD SHY AWAY FROM A JUDICIAL FORECLOSURE:

1.   Judicial foreclosure is costly, since the parties would need to hire lawyers.  But then again, the present rules provide that  court  fees  are  needed  to  be  paid  in  extrajudicial proceedings also.  2.   The  parties  have  very  little  control  over  the  sale  because there is court intervention.

3.   More   susceptible   to   stalling/dilatory   tactics   by   the mortgagor, since he can file all sorts of motions in court to prevent the sale.4.   It is more efficient to have extrajudicial proceedings since for judicial proceedings, there is a minimum lapse of time of 6 years. EXTRAJUDICIAL FORECLOSURE

(UNDER    ACT    3135/4118    AND    SC    ADMINISTRATIVE CIRCULAR)

WHERE SHOULD AN EXTRAJUDICIAL FORECLOSURE SALE BE DONE?> Sale  cannot  be  made  legally  outside  the  city  or  province wherein  the  property  sold  is  situated.    In  case  the  place has  been  stipulated,  it  shall  be  made  in  the  municipal building of the said place

NOTICE OF THE SALE

1.   POSTING  of  the  notices  of  the  sale  FOR  NOT  LESS  THAN 20 DAYS in at  least 3 public  places  of the municipality or city where the property is situated

2.   IF  THE  PROPERTY  IS  WORTH  MORE  THAN  P400,  such notice  shall  also  be  published  once  a  week  at  least  3 consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the municipality or city.  (You don't

need to count 6 days between publications.)NOTE:  there  is  jurisprudence,  which  held  that  there  is  sufficient notice when there is publication.

PUBLIC AUCTION/SALE

1.   Time shall be between 9AM and 4PM.  It shall be made in the  direction  of  the  sheriff  of  the  province,  the  justice  or auxiliary justice of the peace of the municipality, or of the notary    public    of    the   

municipality,    who    shall    be compensated  with  P5  for  each  day  of  actual  work  or performance in addition to his expenses.

2.   Anyone may  bid at the  sale,  unless there  are  stipulations in the agreement.

POSSESSION> Upon foreclosure, if the mortgagor is in possession of the property,  he  will  retain  possession  during  the  redemption period—1 year from the date of sale> If   the   winning   bidder   wants   possession   during   the redemption period, he may execute a bond in the amount equivalent  to  the  use  of  the  property  for  12  months,  to indemnify the debtor in case it be shown that the sale was made without violating the mortgage or without complying with the requirements of the Act.  Upon approval, a writ of possession will be issued in his favor.>  If  the  winning  bidder  is  able  to  secure  possession,  the mortgagor may petition that the sale is set aside

67

Page 68: SUMMARY - Salescredit

and the writ  of  possession  be  cancelled  on  the  ground  that  he wasn't   in   default   or   that   the   sale   wasn't   made   in accordance  with  Act  3135.    This  must  be  filed  within  30 days from issuance of the writ of possession.

RIGHT OF REDEMPTION

> The  debtor,  his  successors-in-interest,  or  any  judicial creditor or judgment creditor of said debtor, or any person having a lien on the property subsequent to the mortgage or  deed  of  trust  under  which  the  property  is  sold,  may redeem  the  same  at  any  time  WITHIN  THE  TERM  OF  1 YEAR FROM AND AFTER THE DATE OF THE SALE and such will be governed by the Rules of Court> When  the  property  is  redeemed  after  the  purchaser  has been given possession, the redeemer is entitled to deduct from  the   price   of  redemption   any  rentals  that  said purchaser may have collected in case the property or any part thereof was rented.  If the property  was used as  his own dwelling, it being town property, or used it gainfully, it being  rural  property,  the  redeemer  may  deduct  from  theprice the interest of 1% per month provided in the Rules of Court. RULES OF COURT, RULE 39, SECTIONS 29 TO 31, AND 35

Sec.  29.  Effect  of  redemption  by  judgment  obligor,  and  a certificate  to  be  delivered  and  recorded  thereupon;  to whom payments on redemption made. If  the  judgment  obligor  redeems,  he  must  make  the  same payments   as   are   required   to   effect   a   redemption   by   a redemptioner, whereupon, no further redemption shall be allowed and  he  is  restored  to  his  estate.  The  person  to  whom  theredemption  payment  is  made  must  execute  and  deliver  to  him  a certificate  of  redemption  acknowledged  before  a  notary  public  or other officer authorized to take  acknowledgments of conveyances of real property. Such certificate must be filed and recorded in the registry of deeds of the place in which the property is situated, and the registrar of deeds must note the record thereof on the margin of the record of the certificate of sale. The payments mentioned in this and the last preceding sections may be made to the purchaser r redemptioner, or for him to the officer who made the sale.

Sec. 30. Proof required of redemptioner.A redemptioner must produce to the officer, or person from whom he seeks to redeem, and serve with his notice to the officer a copy of the judgment or final order under which he claims the right to redeem, certified by the clerk of the court wherein the judgment or final order is entered; or, if he redeems upon a mortgage or other lien,  a  memorandum  of  the  record  thereof,  certified  by  the registrar  of  deeds;  or  an  original  or  certified  copy  of  any assignment  necessary  to  establish  his  claim;  and  an  affidavitexecuted  by  him  or  his  agent,  showing  the  amount  then  actually due on the lien.

Sec.  31.  Manner  of  using  premises  pending  redemption; waste restrained.Until the expiration  of the time allowed for redemption, the court may,  as  in  other  proper  cases,  restrain  the  commission  of  waste on the property by injunction, on the application of the purchaser or the judgment obligee, with or without notice; but it is not waste for a person in possession of the property at the time of the sale, or entitled to possession afterwards, during the period allowed for redemption, to continue to use it in the same  manner in which it was  previously  used;  or  to  use  it  in  the  ordinary  course  of husbandry; or to make the necessary repairs to buildings thereon while he occupies the property.

Sec. 35. Right to contribution or reimbursement.When  property  liable  to  an  execution  against  several  persons  is sold thereon, and more than a due proportion  of the judgment is satisfied out of the proceeds of the sale of the property of one of them,  or  one  of  them  pays,  without  a  sale,  more  than  his proportion,  he  may  compel  a  contribution  from  the  others;  and when a judgment is upon an obligation of one of them, as security for another, and the surety pays the amount, or any part thereof, either  by  sale  of  his  property  or  before  sale,  he  may  compel repayment from the principal.

GENERAL BANKING LAW OF 2000, SECTION 47

68

Page 69: SUMMARY - Salescredit

Sec. 47. Foreclosure of Real Estate Mortgage. - In the event of   foreclosure,   whether   judicially   or   extra-judicially,   of   any mortgage  on  real  estate  which  is  security  for  any  loan  or  other credit  accommodation  granted,  the  mortgagor  or  debtor  whose real  property  has  been  sold  for  the  full  or  partial  payment  of  his obligation shall have the right within one year after the sale of the real  estate,  to  redeem  the  property  by  paying  the  amount  due under the mortgage deed, with interest thereon at rate specified in the mortgage, and all the costs and expenses incurred by the bank or  institution  from the  sale and custody  of  said property less the income derived therefrom. However, the purchaser at the auction sale  concerned  whether  in  a  judicial  or  extra-judicial  foreclosure shall  have  the  right  to  enter  upon  and  take  possession  of  such property  immediately  after  the  date  of  the  confirmation  of  the auction sale and administer the same in accordance with law.  Any petition  in  court  to  enjoin  or  restrain  the  conduct  of  foreclosure proceedings instituted pursuant to this provision shall be given duecourse  only  upon  the  filing  by  the  petitioner  of  a  bond  in  an amount  fixed  by  the  court  conditioned  that  he  will  pay  all  the damages  which  the  bank  may  suffer  by  the  enjoining  or  therestraint of the foreclosure proceeding.

Notwithstanding  Act  3135,  juridical  persons  whose  property  is being sold pursuant to an extrajudicial foreclosure, shall have the right  to  redeem  the  property  in  accordance  with  this  provisionuntil, but not after, the registration of the certificate of foreclosure sale with the applicable Register of Deeds which in no case shall be more than three (3) months after foreclosure, whichever is earlier. Owners of property that has been sold in a foreclosure sale prior to the effectivity of this Act shall retain their redemption rights until their expiration.

NOTES:1.   For  judicial  foreclosure,  the  redemption  period  is  within one  year.    For  extrajudicial,  its  90  days  from  sale  or registration.2.   The  purpose  is  to  give  concession  to  the  banks.    Banks cannot  get  properties  mortgaged  by  those  in  financial distress.3.   The  redemption  price  would  be  the  mortgaged  obligation plus  the  interest  as  stipulated  in  the  original  obligation.  Compare   this   with   judicial   foreclosure   wherein   the redemption  price  is  the  original  price.    In  this  case,  you have to pay more when redeeming from a bank.4.   There is immediate possession5.   A  motion  to  enjoin  would  not  be  entertained  unless secured by a bond.6.   Court  will  fix  the  amount  of  the  bond.    Normally,  this would  be  the  liability  of  the  bank  plus  costs.    This remedied  the  loopholes  in  Act  3135—protect  the  bank during   foreclosures.      This   makes   it   hard   to   secure injunctions and it shortens the redemption period.

ANTICHRESIS

(ARTICLES 2132-2139)

Art.   2132.  By  the  contract   of  antichresis  the  creditor acquires the right to receive the fruits  of an immovable of his  debtor,   with  the   obligation  to  apply  them  to  the payment  of  the  interest,  if  owing,  and  thereafter  to  the principal of his credit. (1881)

Art. 2133. The actual market value of the fruits at the time of the application thereof to the interest and principal shall be the measure of such application. (n)

Art.  2134.  The  amount  of  the  principal  and  of  the  interest shall  be  specified  in  writing;  otherwise,  the  contract  of antichresis shall be void. (n)

Art. 2135. The creditor, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, is obliged to pay the taxes and charges upon the estate.

69

Page 70: SUMMARY - Salescredit

He  is  also bound  to  bear  the  expenses  necessary  for  its preservation and repair.

The sums spent for the purposes stated in this article shall be deducted from the fruits. (1882)

Art.  2136.  The  debtor  cannot  reacquire  the  enjoyment  of the  immovable  without  first  having  totally  paid  what  he owes the creditor.

But   the   latter,   in   order   to   exempt   himself   from   the obligations imposed upon him by the preceding article, may always   compel   the   debtor   to   enter   again   upon   the enjoyment   of   the   property,   except   when   there   is   a stipulation to the contrary. (1883)

Art.  2137.  The  creditor  does  not  acquire  the  ownership  of the  real  estate  for  non-payment  of  the  debt  within  the period agreed upon.

Every  stipulation  to  the  contrary  shall  be  void.  But  the creditor may petition the court for the payment of the debt or  the  sale  of  the  real  property.  In  this  case,  the  Rules  of Court on the foreclosure of mortgages shall apply. (1884a)

Art.  2138.  The  contracting  parties  may  stipulate  that  the interest  upon  the  debt  be  compensated  with  the  fruits  of the property which is the object of the antichresis, provided that if the value  of the fruits should exceed the amount of interest allowed by the laws against usury, the excess shall be applied to the principal. (1885a)

Art.  2139.  The  last  paragraph  of  Article  2085,  and  Articles 2089 to 2091 are applicable to this contract. (1886a)

ANTICHRESIS

> The  creditor  acquires  the  right  to  receive  the  fruits  of  an immovable of his debtor, with the obligation to apply them o the payment of the interest, if owing, and thereafter to the principal of his credit

> Arrangement  that  the  fruits  will  be  used  to  liquify  the principal obligation> Doesn't  create  a lien  but  only the grant  of the use  of the fruits

CHARACTERISTICS OF AN ANTICHRESIS

1.   Accessory contract2.   Formal  contract—it  must  be  in  writing;  the  principal obligation and the interest secured must be in writing

THERE  IS  NO  NEED  TO  TRANSFER  POSSESSION.    WHAT  IS ESSENTIAL IS THE GRANT OF THE USE OF THE FRUITS.

ADDITIONAL BENEFIT IN HAVING A CONTRACT OF ANTICHRESIS

> In  the  absence  of  a  contract  of  antichresis,  the  debtor could just issue a special power of attorney in favor of the creditor for the collection of the fruits of the immovable.> The additional benefit is that at the failure of the debtor to pay  the  principal  obligation,  the  creditor  may  have  the property subject of antichresis foreclosed

MEASURE  OF  APPLICATION  OF  FRUITS  TO  INTEREST  AND PRINCIPAL

> Must be appraised at their actual market value at the time of application

70

Page 71: SUMMARY - Salescredit

FORM OF CONTRACT

> The amount of the principal and interest shall be specified in writing> Otherwise, the contract is void

DEFAULT  RULES  TO  BE  FOLLOWED  (TAKE  NOTE  SO  THAT YOU WILL KNOW WHEN TO OPT OUT OF THE RULES)

1.   The  creditor  advances  for  the  taxes,  charges,  as  well  as the   necessary   expenses   for   the   preservation   of   the property2.   The  law  uses  the  term  “advances”  as  the  fruits  of  the immovable  may  be  applied  to  the  expenses  and  charges.  If  the  creditor  doesn't  want  to  advance,  he  may  just surrender the immovable to the debtor3.   The debtor may  not reacquire the enjoyment of the thing until full payment of the obligation.4.   The  creditor  doesn't  acquire  ownership  of  the  immovable for nonpayment of the debt within the period agreed upon.  Every stipulation to the contrary is void.  The creditor may petition  the  court  to  foreclose  the  property.

>>THERE  IS POSSIBILITY TO HAVE ALTERNATIVE ARRANGEMENTS FOR FORECLOSURE.

CHATTEL MORTGAGE

(ARTICLES 2140-2141, CHATTEL MORTGAGE LAW)

Art.  2140.  By  a  chattel  mortgage,  personal  property  is recorded in the Chattel Mortgage Register as a security for the performance of an obligation. If the movable, instead of being  recorded,  is  delivered  to  the  creditor  or  a  third person, the contract is a pledge and not a chattel mortgage. (n)

CHATTEL MORTGAGE

> Contract  by  virtue  of  which  personal  property  is  recorded in  the  Chattel  Mortgage  Register  as  security  for  the performance of an obligation

CHARACTERISTICS

1.   Accessory contract2.   Formal contract

WHAT MAKES IT DIFFERENT FROM A PLEDGE?

1.   Delivery of the personal property to the mortgagee  is not necessary2.   The registration in the Register is required by law3.   Procedure for the sale of the thing is different4.   If  the  property  is  foreclosed  and  there  is  excess,  the amount goes to the debtor5.   If  there  is  deficiency,  the  creditor  may  recover  the deficiency

WHEN DO YOU DO A Chattel Mortgage OR PLEDGE?

71

Page 72: SUMMARY - Salescredit

> When  property  needs  to  be  retained  by  the  debtor,  then opt for a chattel mortgage

Art. 2141. The provisions of this Code on pledge, insofar as they are not in conflict with the Chattel Mortgage Law shall be applicable to chattel mortgages. (n)

LAWS GOVERNING CHATTEL MORTGAGE

1.   Chattel mortgage law, Act 15082.   Civil Code provisions3.   Revised Administrative Code4.   Revised Penal Code

OFFENSES INVOLVING CHATTEL MORTGAGE

1.   Knowingly  removing  personal  property  mortgaged  to  any province or city other than the one in which it was located at the time  of the execution  of the mortgage without the written consent2.   Selling or pledging personal property already mortgaged or any part thereof, under the terms  of the Chattel Mortgage Law  without the  consent  of  the  mortgage  written  on  the  back  of  the mortgage and duly recorded in the CM Register

REGISTRATION

> Registration shall be done in the Register of Deeds where the mortgagor resides> And  when  the  property  is  situated  somewhere  else,  it needs to be registered also in the Register of Deeds of the area where the property is situated> Chattel  mortgage  would  not  be  valid  and  binding  as against third persons absent any registration> If what is mortgaged is a car, registration with the LTO is also  needed.    Absent  this,  again,  it  would  not  be  binding and invalid as against third persons

FORM  OF CONTRACT AS STATED IN  THE LAW.  

> Theoretically,  the  mortgagor  may  sign  the  contract  alone but  practically,  the  mortgagee  must  sign  also  given  that they both need to sign the affidavit of good faith

AFFIDAVIT OF GOOD FAITH

> Part  of  the  chattel  mortgage  contract  wherein  it  is  stated that the chattel mortgage has been constituted to secure a principal  obligation  and  not  meant  for  fraud  or  any  ill purpose> It  is  possible  to  defraud  using  mortgage.    You  can  take away  property  through  mortgage  from  an  unsecured creditor.

FORMAL REQUIREMENT OF DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY

> Attach   a   description   or   schedule   of   the   properties mortgaged> There  is  also  the  requirement  of  payment  of  registration fees and documentary stamp taxes

FORECLOSURE (SIMILAR BUT NOT IDENTICAL WITH REM) SECTION 14, CHATTEL MORTGAGE LAW

1.   There  is  a  30-day  cooling  off  period  before  the  public auction, from the time the condition is broken2.   Notice—at least 10 days notice of the time, day, place, and purpose of such sale has been posted at 2 or more public places  in  such  municipality.    Personal  notice  or  mail  shall also  be  given  to  the  mortgagor 

72

Page 73: SUMMARY - Salescredit

or  person  holding  under him and the persons holding subsequent mortgages of the time and place of sale.3.   Sheriff should possess the property as he needs to deliver the same to the winning bidder.  If the mortgagor refuses to  do  so,  the  mortgagee  can  seek  the  help  of  the  court.  There  could  also  be  a  stipulation  in  the  contract  as  well.  But if the debtor is not willing and able, the loss is with the creditor.4.   There is a 30-day equity of redemption period (payment of obligation)5.   After  foreclosure,  there  could  be  recovery  of  deficiency, but  there  is  Recto  Law  (1484)  pertaining  to  sale  of personal  property  in  installments  and  there  is  a  Chattel Mortgage  to secure payment of price.

>>AN ACTION FOR SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE IS TANTAMOUNT TO THE ABANDONMENT OF RIGHTS OF MORTGAGEE

APPLICATION OF PROCEEDS OF FORECLOSURE

1.   Costs2.   Obligation  itself.    Pay  first  the  interest  and  then  the principal.  If there is penalty, then pay it first.3.   Junior encumbrances4.   Owner

OBLIGATION OF PLEDGEE NOT TO USE THING PLEDGED

Art.  2104.  The  creditor  cannot  use  the  thing  pledged, without the authority of the owner, and if he should do so, or should misuse the thing in any other way, the owner may ask  that  it  be  judicially  or  extrajudicially  deposited.  When the  preservation  of  the  thing  pledged  requires  its  use,  it must  be  used  by  the  creditor  but  only  for  that  purpose. (1870a)

>  The pledgee who is in possession of the thing pledged has no  right  to  make  use  of  it  without  permission  from  the owner>  If  however,  the  thing  pledged  is  of  such  a  character  that use is necessary in properly caring for it, then it becomes his duty to use it so that it will not suffer from its disuse—if from the use thereof profits are derived, the pledgee must account  such  profits  to  the  pledgor  and  apply  the  net proceeds of such use to the payment of his claim

RIGHT  OF  THE  PLEDGOR  TO  ASK  THE  THING  PLEDGED  TO BE DEPOSITED

1.   If the creditor uses the thing without authority2.   If he misuses the thing in any other way3.   If the thing is in danger of being lost or impaired because of the negligence or willful act of the pledgee

Danger To The Thing Pledged

Art.  2107.  If  there  are  reasonable  grounds  to  fear  the destruction or impairment of the thing pledged, without the fault of the pledgee, the pledgor may demand the return of the  thing,  upon  offering  another  thing  in  pledge,  provided the  latter  is  of  the  same  kind  as  the  former  and  not  of inferior  quality,  and  without  prejudice  to  the  right  of  the pledgee under the provisions of the following article.  The pledgee is bound to advise the pledgor, without delay, of any danger to the thing pledged. (n)

REQUISITES FOR THE APPLICATION OF ARTICLE 2107

73

Page 74: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   The pledgor has reasonable grounds to fear the destruction or impairment of the thing pledged 2.   There is no fault on the part of the pledgor 3.   The pledgor is offering in place of the thing, another thing in  pledge  which  is  of  the  same  kind  and  quality  as  the former 4.   The  pledgee doesn't  choose to  exercise  his right to  cause the thing pledged to be sold at public auction

RIGHT OF PLEDGEE TO CAUSE THE SALE OF THE  THING PLEDGED

Art.  2108.  If,  without  the  fault  of  the  pledgee,  there  is danger of destruction, impairment, or diminution in value of the  thing  pledged,  he  may  cause  the  same  to  be  sold  at  a public sale. The proceeds of the auction shall be a security for the principal obligation in the same manner as the thing originally pledged. (n) >  This  right  is  superior  to  that  of  the  pledgor  to  substitute the thing pledged  > The right given to the pledgor is  without prejudice to the right of the pledgee

RIGHT OF PLEDGEE TO DEMAND SUBSTITUTE OR IMMEDIATE PAYMENT

Art.  2109.  If  the  creditor  is  deceived  on  the  substance  or quality  of  the  thing  pledged,  he  may  either  claim  another thing  in  its  stead,  or  demand  immediate  payment  of  the principal obligation. (n) 1.   To claim another thing in pledge, and 2.   To demand immediate payment of the principal obligation >  The  abovementioned  are  alternative  remedies—to  choose only one but not both

EXTINGUISHMENT  OF  PLEDGE  BY  RETURN  OF  THE  THING PLEDGED

Art. 2110. If the thing pledged is returned by the pledgee to the  pledgor  or  owner,  the  pledge  is  extinguished.  Any stipulation to the contrary shall be void.  If subsequent to the perfection of the pledge, the thing is in the  possession  of  the  pledgor  or  owner,  there  is  a  prima facie presumption that the same has  been  returned  by the pledgee. This same presumption exists if the thing pledged is  in  the  possession  of  a  third  person  who  has  received  it from  the  pledgor  or  owner  after  the  constitution  of  the pledge. (n)  > One of the essential requisites of pledge is that the thing pledged  be  placed  in  the  possession  of  the  pledgee  or  a third person designated by the parties > Hence, the  pledge  is extinguished once the thing  pledged is   return   in   the   possession   of   the   pledgor.  This notwithstanding  any  stipulation  that  the  pledge  would continue although the pledgee is no longer in possession of the thing pledged >  The pledge is also extinguished by payment of the debt, by renunciation or abandonment of the pledge and by sale of the thing pledged at public auction  

PRESUMPTION OF EXTINGUISHMENT OF PLEDGE > Possession  by  the  debtor  or  owner  of  the  thing  pledged subsequent to the perfection of the pledge gives rise to a prima facie presumption that the thing has been returned and therefore, the pledge has been extinguished > This presumption may be disputed or rebutted by evidence to the contrary > Only  the  accessory  obligation  is  presumed  remitted  and not the principal obligation 

EXTINGUISHMENT OF PLEDGE BY RENUNCIATION OR ABANDONMENT

74

Page 75: SUMMARY - Salescredit

Art.  2111.  A  statement  in  writing  by  the  pledgee  that  he renounces   or   abandons   the   pledge   is   sufficient   to extinguish   the   pledge.   For   this   purpose,   neither   the acceptance  by  the  pledgor  or  owner,  nor  the  return  of  the thing   pledged   is   necessary,   the   pledgee   becoming   a depositary. (n)

> The  renunciation  or  abandonment  must  be  in  writing  to constitute an extinguishment of pledge

> The  renunciation  is  not  conditioned  upon  the  acceptance by the pledgor or  owner nor  upon the return of the thing pledged

> Under  this  article,  the  thing  pledged  remains  in  the possession  of  the  pledgee.    Hence  the  renunciation  must be in writing.

RIGHT OF PLEDGEE TO CAUSE SALE OF THE THING PLEDGED

Art.  2112.  The  creditor  to  whom  the  credit  has  not  been satisfied in due time, may proceed before a Notary Public to the sale of the thing pledged. This sale shall be made at a public  auction,  and  with  notification  to  the  debtor  and  the owner  of  the  thing  pledged  in  a  proper  case,  stating  the amount for which the public sale is to be held. If at the first auction  the  thing  is  not  sold,  a  second  one  with  the  same formalities shall be held; and if at the second auction there is  no  sale  either,  the  creditor  may  appropriate  the  thing pledged.  In  this  case  he  shall  be  obliged  to  give  an acquittance for his entire claim. (1872a) > The thing pledged may be alienated for the payment to the creditor when the principal obligation becomes due  

THE FORMALITIES REQUIRED FOR SUCH SALE

1.   The debt is due and unpaid 2.   The sale must be at a public auction 3.   There must be notice to the pledgor and owner, stating the amount due 4.   The  sale  must  be  made  with  the  intervention  of  a  notary public  

RIGHT OF PLEDGEE TO APPROPRIATE THING PLEDGED > Serves  as  an  exception  to  the  prohibition  on  pactum commissorium > The pledgee may appropriate the thing pledged if after the first and second auctions, the thing is not sold > If the creditor appropriates the thing, it shall be considered as full payment of his entire claim—he is thus obliged to an acquittance  for  the  same.    The  debtor  is  not  entitled  for the excess in case the value of the thing pledged is more than the principal obligation.

RIGHT OF PLEDGOR AND PLEDGEE TO BID AT PUBLIC SALE

Art. 2113. At the public auction, the pledgor or owner may bid.  He  shall,  moreover,  have  a  better  right  if  he  should offer the same terms as the highest bidder.  The pledgee may also bid, but his offer shall not be valid if he is the only bidder. (n)  RIGHT OF PLEDGOR AND PLEDGEE TO BID AT PUBLIC SALE      To  avoid  fraud,  the  pledgee  is  not  allowed  to  acquire  the thing pledged if he is the only bidder

IN PLEDGE, BID MUST BE FOR CASH

Art.  2114.  All  bids  at  the  public  auction  shall  offer  to  pay the purchase price at once. If any other bid is accepted, the pledgee  is  deemed  to  have  been  received  the  purchase price, as far as the pledgor or owner is concerned. (n)

75

Page 76: SUMMARY - Salescredit

EFFECT OF SALE OF THING PLEDGED

Art. 2115. The sale of the thing pledged shall extinguish the principal obligation, whether or not the proceeds of the sale are equal to the amount of the principal obligation, interest and  expenses  in  a  proper  case.  If  the  price  of  the  sale  is more than said amount, the debtor shall not be entitled to the excess, unless it is otherwise agreed. If the price of the sale is less, neither shall the creditor be entitled to recover the   deficiency,   notwithstanding   any   stipulation   to   the contrary. (n) 1.   If  the  price  of  the  sale  is  more  than  the  amount  due  the creditor, the debtor is not entitled to the excess unless the contrary is provided 2.   If the price of sale is less, neither is the creditor entitled to recover the deficiency a.    The  reason  is  to  compel  the  creditor  to  hold  an honest public sale b.   Creditor  should  realize  the  loans  only  as  much  as he is likely to realize at a public sale  

RIGHT OF DEBTOR TO EXCESS

> GENERAL  RULE—the  debtor  is  not  entitled  to  the  excess unless there is an agreement to the contrary > To compensate the creditor for his risk of not being able to recover  the  deficiency  in  case  the  thing  pledged  is  sold below the amount of the principal obligation

PLEDGE

(ARTICLES 2085-2123)

PROVISIONS COMMON TO PLEDGE AND MORTGAGE

Art.  2085.  The  following  requisites  are  essential  to  the contracts of pledge and mortgage:

(1) That they be constituted to secure the fulfillment of a principal obligation;

(2)  That  the  pledgor  or  mortgagor  be  the  absolute owner of the thing pledged or mortgaged;

(3)   That   the   persons   constituting   the   pledge   or mortgage  have  the  free  disposal  of  their  property,  and  in the absence thereof, that they be legally authorized for the purpose.

Third persons who are not parties to the principal obligation may secure the latter by pledging or mortgaging their own property. (1857)

Art. 2086. The provisions of Article 2052 are applicable to a pledge or mortgage. (n)

Art. 2087. It is also of  the essence  of these contracts that when  the  principal  obligation  becomes  due,  the  things  in which the pledge or mortgage consists may be alienated for the payment to the creditor. (1858)

PLEDGE>     Contract  by  virtue  of  which  the  debtor  delivers  to  the creditor  or  to  a  third  person  a  movable,  or  document evidencing  incorporeal  rights,  for  the  purpose  of  securing the   fulfillment   of   a   principal   obligation    with   the understanding  that  when  the  obligation  is  fulfilled,  the thing  delivered  shall  be  returned  with  all  its  fruits  and accessions

KINDS OF PLEDGE1.   Voluntary or conventional2.   Legal

76

Page 77: SUMMARY - Salescredit

REQUISITES TO A CONTRACT OF PLEDGE

1.   It  be  constituted  to  secure  the  fulfillment  of  a  principal obligation2.   The pledgor be the absolute owner of the thing pledged3.   That  the  persons  constituting  the  pledge  have  the  free disposal  of  the  property  and  in  the  absence  thereof,  that they be legally authorized for the purpose4.   The  pledge  is  perfected  by  the  delivery  of  the  thing pledged5.   When  the  principal  obligation  becomes  due,  the  things, which  the  pledge  consists,  may  be  alienated  for  the payment of the creditor.

CHARACTERISTICS OF A CONTRACT OF PLEDGE

1.   Real  contract—perfected  by  the  delivery  of  the  things pledged  by  the  debtor  who  is  called  the  pledgor  to  the creditor who is called by the pledgee, or to a third person by common agreement2.   Accessory contract3.   Unilateral contract4.   Subsidiary contract

WHAT IS THE CAUSE OR CONSIDERATION IN PLEDGE?

>     Pledge is an accessory contract >     Its cause is the principal obligation

CONSTITUTED TO SECURE THE FULFILLMENT OF THE PRINCIPAL OBLIGATION

CONSTITUTED BY THE ABSOLUTE OWNER

1.   Future  property  cannot  be  the  subject  of  a  pledge  or mortgage2.   A  pledge  or  mortgage  executed  by  one  who  is  not  the owner  of  the  property  pledged  or  mortgaged  is  without legal existence and registration cannot validate it3.   Share  in  a  co-ownership—shall  be  limited  to  the  portion which  may  be  alienated  by  him  in  the  division  upon  the termination of the co-ownership

What   is   the    absolute    owner?      It   means unencumbered  property.    The  absolute  owner  has  legal and beneficial ownership.  In the earlier example, P is the legal owner and S is the beneficial owner.  This being the case, neither of them can pledge the property.

WHAT  IS  THE  DIFFERENCE  BETWEEN  FREE  DISPOSAL  AND CAPACITY TO DISPOSE?

>     FREE DISPOSAL OF THE PROPERTY—property must not be subject to any claim of a third person>     CAPACITY  TO  DISPOSE—pledgor  or  mortgagor  has  the capacity or authority to make a disposition of the property

THING PLEDGED OR MORTGAGED MAY BE ALIENATED

>     Necessarily   implied   as   an   inherent   element   of   the transaction of the mortgage or pledge>     The  only  remedy  for  the  pledgee  is  to  have  the  security given sold at public auction and the proceeds of the sale be applied  to  the  payment  of  the  obligation  secured  by  the mortgage or pledge

PLEDGOR OR MORTGAGOR MAY BE A THIRD PERSON

77

Page 78: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   Accommodation pledge or mortgage2.   Duty of mortgagee to make proper inquiry3.   Where  mortgage  is  gratuitous—same  should  be  strictly construed4.   Liability for deficiency—pledgor not liable for any deficiency should the property be not sufficient to cover the debt

RIGHT OF CREDITOR WHERE DEBTOR FAILS TO COMPLY WITH HIS OBLIGATION IN PLEDGE

1. If the debtor fails to comply with the obligation at the time it falls due, the creditor is merely entitled to move for the sale of thing pledged 2. The creditor cannot appropriate himself without foreclosure the thing pledged as pledge or under mortgage nor can he dispose of the same as owner

RISK OF LOSS OF PROPERTY PLEDGED OR MORTGAGED

> Debtor-owner bears the loss of the property > The principal obligation is not extinguished upon the loss of the thing pledged or mortgaged

PLEDGE OR MORTGAGE INDIVISIBLE, EXCEPTIONS

Art. 2089. A pledge or mortgage is indivisible, even though the debt may be divided among the successors in interest of the debtor or of the creditor.  Therefore, the debtor’s heir who has paid a part of the debt cannot  ask  for  the  proportionate  extinguishment  of  the pledge  or  mortgage  as  long  as  the  debt  is  not  completely satisfied.  Neither can the creditor’s heir who received his share of the debt  return  the  pledge  or  cancel  the  mortgage,  to  the prejudice of the other heirs who have not been paid.  From these provisions is expected the case in which, there being several things given in mortgage or pledge, each one of them guarantees only a determinate portion of the credit. The   debtor,   in   this   case,   shall   have   a   right   to   the extinguishment of the pledge or mortgage as the portion of the  debt  for  which  each  thing  is  specially  answerable  is satisfied. (1860)  Art. 2090. The indivisibility  of a  pledge  or  mortgage is  not affected  by  the  fact  that  the  debtors  are  not  solidarily liable. (n)  

PLEDGE OR MORTGAGE INDIVISIBLE

> Rule applies even if the obligation is joint and not solidary > The divisibility of the principal obligation doesn't affect the indivisibility of the mortgage or pledge

 

EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULE OF INDIVISIBILITY

1.   Where each one of several things guarantees determinate portions of credit 2.   Where only a portion of the loan was released 3.   Where there was failure of consideration 4.   Where there is no debtor-creditor relationship  

FORECLOSURE  OF  MORTGAGE  CONSTITUTED  ON  SEVERAL PROPERTIES

78

Page 79: SUMMARY - Salescredit

> A mortgage even constituted on  several properties is  one and  indivisible,  that  is,  it  cannot  be  divided  among  the several properties and the mortgagee has the right to have the  properties  either  or  both,  jointly  or  singly,  sold  to satisfy his claim > Further,  the  sale  of  the  mortgaged  properties  cannot  be set aside in the absence of evidence to show that a better price   could   have   been   obtained   if   they   were   sold separately,  or  the  sale  of  one  or  some  alone  would  bring sufficient proceeds to satisfy the mortgage credit 

ALL KINDS OF OBLIGATIONS, WHETHER PURE OR CONDITIONAL, CAN BE SECURED BY PLEDGE OR MORTGAGE

Art. 2091.  The contract of pledge  or  mortgage may secure all  kinds  of  obligations,  be  they  pure  or  subject  to  a suspensive or resolutory condition.

PROMISE TO CONSTITUTE PLEDGE OR MORTGAGE CREATES NO REAL RIGHT

Art.  2092.  A  promise  to  constitute  a  pledge  or  mortgage gives rise only to a personal action between the contracting parties,  without  prejudice  to  the  criminal  responsibility incurred by him who defrauds another, by offering in pledge or mortgage as unencumbered, things which he knew were subject  to  some  burden,  or  by  misrepresenting  himself  to be the owner of the same. (1862)

> A  promise  to  constitute  a  pledge  or  mortgage  only  gives rise to a personal right> What  exists  only  is  the  right  of  action  to  compel  the fulfillment  of  the  promise  but  there  is  no  pledge  or mortgage yet

TRANSFER OF POSSESSION ESSENTIAL IN PLEDGE

Art. 2093. In addition to the requisites prescribed in Article 2085, it is necessary, in order to constitute the contract of pledge, that the thing pledged be placed in the possession of the creditor, or of a third person by common agreement. (1863) > An  agreement  to  constitute  a  pledge  only  gives  rise  to  a personal action between the contracting parties > Unless  the  movable  given  as  security  is  delivered  and placed  in  the  possession  of  the  creditor  or  third  person designated  by  the  parties,  the  creditor  acquires  no  real right  to  the  property  because  pledge  is  merely  a  lien  or encumbrance indispensable to the right of lien > Without delivery there can be no pledge  

TYPE  OF  DELIVERY  DEPENDS  UPON  NATURE  OF  THING PLEDGED

> Actual  delivery—there  should  be  actual  possession  of  the property pledged  > But it was held in an earlier case that the symbolic transfer of the goods is acceptable when the owner of the property could  no  longer  dispose  of  the  goods,  the  pledgee  being the only one authorized to do so  

Art.  2094.  All  movables,  which  are  within  commerce,  may be  pledged,  provided  they  are  susceptible  of  possession. (1864)  Art.  2095.   Incorporeal   rights,  evidenced   by  negotiable instruments,   bills   of   lading,   shares   of   stock,   bonds, warehouse  receipts  and  similar  documents  may  also  be pledged. The instrument proving the right pledged shall be delivered   to   the   creditor,   and   if   negotiable,   must   be indorsed. (n)  SUBJECT MATTER OF PLEDGE      Confined and limited to personal property and it cannot be extended to real property      Incorporeal   rights   evidenced   by   documents   whether negotiable or not may also be pledged

79

Page 80: SUMMARY - Salescredit

IN PLEDGE, PUBLIC INSTRUMENT NECESSARY TO BIND THIRD PERSONS

Art.  2096.  A  pledge  shall  not  take  effect  against  third persons if a description of the thing pledged and the date of the pledge do not appear in a public instrument. (1865a)  

PUBLIC INSTRUMENT NECESSARY TO BIND THIRD PERSONS

1.   CONTENTS OF PUBLIC INSTRUMENT a.    The  pledge  is  not  binding  against  third  persons unless in addition to delivery of the thing pledged, it is embodied in a public instrument b.   Description  of  the  thing  pledged;  and  the  date  of pledge 2.   OBJECT OF THE REQUIREMENT—to forestall fraud, because a  debtor  may  attempt  to  conceal  his  property  from  his creditors  when  he  sees  it  in  danger  of  execution  by simulating a pledge thereof with an accomplice   

THE DATE OF THE PLEDGE IS RELEVANT TO KNOW IF THERE IS VALID CONSIDERATION IN THE FIRST PLACE.  

 WHAT IS A PUBLIC INSTRUMENT?      The  pledge  contract  should  be  the  one  in  the  public instrument, acknowledged by the notary public      What if there is litigation ensued and the pledge is not in a public instrument?  Is this binding upon the court?  No, it is  not.    There  should  be  payment  of  documentary  stamp tax. 

ALIENATION BY THE PLEDGOR OF THE THING PLEDGED

Art.  2097.  With  the  consent  of  the  pledgee,  the  thing pledged may be alienated by the pledgor or owner, subject to  the  pledge.  The  ownership  of  the  thing  pledged  is transmitted  to  the  vendee  or  transferee  as  soon  as  the pledgee  consents  to  the  alienation,  but  the  latter  shall continue in possession. (n) > Remember  that  the  pledgor  retains  ownership  over  the thing pledged > As soon as the pledgee gives his consent, the ownership of the  thing  pledged  is  transferred  to  the  vendee  subject  to the rights of the pledgee, namely—that the thing sold may be alienated to satisfy the obligation; and that the pledgee must  continue  in  possession  during  the  existence  of  the pledge  

THE  PLEDGEE  IS  CONCERNED  WITH  THE  TRANSFER  OF ONWERSHIP  BECAUSE  AS  PLEDGEE,  HE  WOULD  WANT  TO LIMIT THE ENTANGLEMENTS.

RIGHT OF PLEDGEE TO RETAIN THE THING PLEDGED

Art.  2098.  The  contract  of  pledge  gives  a  right  to  the creditor to retain the thing in his possession or in that of a third person to whom it has been delivered, until the debt is paid. (1866a) 

>  This right is limited only to the fulfillment of the  principal obligation for which the pledge was created

RIGHT OF PLEDGEE TO COMPENSATE EARNINGS OF PLEDGE WITH DEBT

> The  pledgee  has  no  right  to  use  the  thing  pledged  or  to appropriate the  fruits thereof  without the  authority  of the owner > The  pledgee  can  apply  the  fruits,  income,  dividends,  or interests  earned  or  produced  by  the  thing  pledged  to  the payment  of  interest,  if  owing,  and  thereafter  to  the principal of his credit > Unless there is stipulation to the contrary, the interest and earnings of the right pledged and in case of animals, their offsprings, are included in the pledge

80

Page 81: SUMMARY - Salescredit

OBLIGATION OF PLEDGEE TO TAKE DUE CARE OF THE THING PLEDGED

Art. 2099. The creditor shall take care of the thing pledged with  the  diligence  of  a  good  father  of  a  family;  he  has  a right  to  the  reimbursement  of  the  expenses  made  for  its preservation,  and  is  liable  for  its  loss  or  deterioration,  in conformity with the provisions of this Code. (1867) > Upon  fulfillment  of  the  principal  obligation,  the  pledgee must return the thing pledged > Having possession of the property, he has the obligation to take care of the same with the diligence of a good father of the family > In case of loss or deterioration of the thing pledged due to a fortuitous event, the pledgee cannot be held responsible but he is liable for loss or deterioration by reason of fraud, negligence, or violation of the terms of the contract 

EFFECTS OF GUARANTY BETWEEN THE DEBTOR  AND THE GUARANTOR

  Art.  2066.  The guarantor who pays for a debtor must be indemnified by the latter.  The indemnity comprises:        (1) The total amount of the debt;        (2)  The  legal  interests thereon  from  the  time  the payment was made known to the debtor, even though it did not earn interest for the creditor;        (3) The expenses incurred by the guarantor after having notified  the  debtor  that  payment  had  been  demanded  of him;        (4) Damages, if they are due. (1838a)  

EXCEPTIONS TO THE RIGHT TO INDEMNITY AND/OR REIMBURSEMENT

1.   Where the guaranty  is constituted  without the knowledge or against the will of  the principal debtor, the guarantor can recover only insofar  as  the  payment had been beneficial to the debtor 2.   Payment by a third  person  who  doesn’t  intend  to  be reimbursed  by  the  debtor  is  deemed  to  be  a  donation, which,  however,  requires  the  consent  of  the  debtor. But the payment is in any case valid as to the creditor who has accepted it.   3.   The right to demand reimbursement is subject to waiver.

BENEFIT OF DIVISION AMONG SEVERAL GUARANTORS

1.   In whose favor applicable—several guarantors of only one debtor and for the same debt2.   Extent  of  liability  of  several  guarantors—joint  liability  to answer for the debt that is divided among them 3.   Exception:  when  solidarity  has  been  stipulated  among themArt.  2065.  Should  there  be  several  guarantors  of  only  one debtor and for the same debt, the obligation to answer for the  same  is  divided  among  all.  The  creditor  cannot  claim from  the  guarantors  except  the  shares,  which  they  are respectively   bound   to   pay,   unless   solidarity   has   been expressly stipulated.  The benefit of division against the co-guarantors ceases in the same cases and for the same reasons as the benefit of excussion against the principal debtor. (1837)  

THE  GUARANTOR  MAY  BE  ENTITLED  TO  THE  BENEFIT  OF DIVISION  WITHOUT  THE  REQUIREMENT  THAT  HE  POINT OUT THE PROPERTY OF HIS CO-GUARANTORS

81

Page 82: SUMMARY - Salescredit

> Obligation  with  the  co-guarantors  is  not  subsidiary  but direct and doesn’t depend as to its origin on the solvency or  insolvency  of  the  latter,  although  afterwards,  if  one  of them  should  turn  out  to  be  insolvent,  his  share  shall  be born by the others 

GUARANTOR’S RIGHT TO SUBROGATION

1.   Accrual, basis and nature of right a.    It arises by operation of law upon payment of the guarantor b.   It is not a contractual right c.    The  guarantor  is  subrogated  by  virtue  of  the payment to the rights of the creditor2.   When  right  not  available—it  cannot  be  invoked  in  those cases where the guarantor has no right to be reimbursedArt. 2067. The guarantor who pays is subrogated by virtue thereof to all the rights, which the creditor had against the debtor.  If  the  guarantor  has  compromised  with  the  creditor,  he cannot demand of the debtor more than what he has really paid. (1839)  

SUBROGATION

> Transfers to the person subrogated, the credit with all the rights  thereto  appertaining  either  against  the  debtor  or against third persons, be they guarantors or possessors of mortgages,    subject    to    stipulation    in    conventional subrogation

EFFECT OF PAYMENT BY GUARANTOR WITHOUT NOTICE TO DEBTOR

Art. 2068. If the guarantor should pay without notifying the debtor, the latter may enforce against him all the defenses which he could have set up against the creditor at the time the payment was made. (1840) > If  the  debtor  has  already  paid  the  creditor  and  the guarantor   pays,   the   debtor   can   set   up   against   the guarantor the defenses  of previous  extinguishment  of the obligation by payment > The guarantor cannot be allowed through his own fault or negligence to prejudice or impair the rights or interests of the debtor 

EFFECT OF REPEAT PAYMENT BY DEBTOR

Art.  2070.  If  the  guarantor  has  paid  without  notifying  the debtor,  and  the  latter  not  being  aware  of  the  payment, repeats  the  payment,  the  former  has  no  remedy  whatever against the  debtor, but only against the creditor. Nevertheless, in  case  of  a  gratuitous  guaranty,  if  the guarantor  was   prevented by a fortuitous event from advising  the  debtor of  the  payment,  and  the  creditor becomes insolvent,  the debtor shall  reimburse the guarantor for the amount paid. (1842a)

> GENERAL RULE—before the guarantor pays the creditor, he must  first  notify  the  debtor.    If  he  fails  to  notify  and  the debtor repeats the payment, the guarantor’s only remedy is to collect from the creditor but he has no cause of action from the debtor. > EXCEPTION: o     Creditor becomes insolvent o     The guarantor  was  prevented by fortuitous event to advise the debtor of the payment  o     The guaranty is gratuitous 

EFFECT  OF  PAYMENT  BY  GUARANTOR  BEFORE  OR  AFTER MATURITY

82

Page 83: SUMMARY - Salescredit

Art.  2069.  If the debt was for a period and the guarantor paid it before it became due, he cannot demand reimbursement of the debtor until the expiration  of  the period unless the payment has been ratified by the debtor. (1841a)

1.   If principal  obligation is  with a period,  it  becomes demandable  only  when the day fixed comes. The guarantor cannot demand reimbursement if he pays before maturity since there is no necessity to accelerate payment.

2.   It would be different though if the debtor consented to the payment  or  subsequently  ratifies  it. The  guarantor  may not demand reimbursement from the debtor.

3.   What  is  controlling  is  that  the  default  or  demand  on guarantor  had taken  place  while  the  guarantee is still  in force—when the payment was made during the term of the guarantee.

Guarantor May Proceed Against Principal Debtor

Art.  2071.  The  guarantor,  even  before  having  paid,  may proceed against the principal debtor:

(1) When he is sued for the payment;(2) In case of insolvency of the principal debtor;(3)  When  the  debtor  has  bound  himself  to  relieve  him from the guaranty within a specified period, and this period has expired;(4) When the debt  has become demandable, by  reason of the expiration of the period for payment;(5)  After  the  lapse  of  ten  years,  when  the  principal obligation has no fixed period for its maturity, unless it be of such nature that it cannot be extinguished except within a period longer than ten years;(6)  If  there  are  reasonable  grounds  to  fear  that  the principal debtor intends to abscond;(7)  If  the  principal  debtor  is  in  imminent  danger  of becoming insolvent.

In  all these cases, the action of the guarantor is to  obtain release  from  the  guaranty,  or  to  demand  a  security  that shall protect him from any proceedings by the creditor and from the danger of insolvency of the debtor. (1834a)>>AS  A  GENERAL  RULE,  THE  GUARANTOR  HAS  NO  CAUSE  OF ACTION  AGAINST THE  DEBTOR  UNTIL  AFTER  THE  FORMER HAS   PAID   THE   OBLIGATION.  NONETHELESS,   THE   7 AFOREMENTIONED ARE INSTANCES WHEN THE GUARANTOR CAN PROCEED AGAINST THE DEBTOR REMEDY TO WHICH GUARANTOR ENTITLED

*Alternative remedies1.   Release from the guaranty2.   Demand  a  security  that  shall  protect  him  from  any proceeding

EFFECTS OF GUARANTY AS BETWEEN CO-GUARANTORS

Art.  2073.  When  there  are  two  or  more  guarantors  of  the same  debtor  and  for  the  same  debt,  the  one  among  them who has paid may demand of each of the others the share, which is proportionally owing from him.  If any of the guarantors should be insolvent, his share shall be  borne  by  the  others,  including  the  payer,  in  the  same proportion.  The provisions of this article shall not be applicable, unless the payment has been made by virtue of a judicial demand or unless the principal debtor is insolvent. (1844a)  

REQUISITES BEFORE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES

83

Page 84: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   Payment has been made by virtue of a judicial demand 2.   Or because the principal debtor is insolvent

EXTINGUISHMENT OF GUARANTY

  Art. 2076. The obligation of the guarantor is extinguished at the  same  time  as  that  of  the  debtor,  and  for  the  same causes as all other obligations. (1847)  CAUSES OF EXTINGUISHMENT OF GUARANTY 1.   Being subsidiary and accessory, it is also terminated when the principal obligation is extinguished  2.   It may itself be extinguished directly although the principal obligation subsists such as in the case of the release of the guarantor by the creditor   

MATERIAL ALTERATION OF PRINCIPAL CONTRACT

1.   Effect  of  material  alteration—any  agreement  between  the creditor  and  principal  debtor  which  essentially  varies  the terms  of the principal contract without the consent  of the surety will release the surety from liability 2.   When  alteration  is  material—the  guarantor  may  not  be released if the change doesn’t have the effect of making its obligation  more  onerous.    There  must  be  change  which imposes  new  obligation  or  added  burden  to  the  party promising  or  which  takes  away  some  obligation  already imposed, changing the legal effect of the original contract and not merely the form thereof.Art.  2077.  If the creditor voluntarily accepts immovable or other  property  in  payment  of  the  debt,  even  if  he  should afterwards lose the same through eviction, the guarantor is released. (1849)  

RELEASE BY CONVEYANCE OF PROPERTY

    Any substitute paid in lieu of money which is accepted by the    creditor    extinguishes    the    obligation    and    in consequence, the guaranty  Art. 2078. A release made by the creditor in favor of one of the guarantors, without the consent of the others, benefits all  to  the  extent  of  the  share  of  the  guarantor  to  whom  it has been granted. (1850)  Art.  2079.  An  extension  granted  to  the  debtor  by  the creditor without the consent of the guarantor extinguishes the guaranty. The mere failure on the part of the creditor to demand payment after the debt has become due does not of itself  constitute  any  extension  of  time  referred  to  herein. (1851a)

 

RELEASE  BY  EXTENSION  OF  TERM  GRANTED  BY  CREDITOR TO DEBTOR

1.   Where   the   release   without   consent   of   guarantor—guarantor is released from his undertaking 2.   Where   obligation   payable   in   installments—where   a guarantor   is   liable   for   several   payments,   such   as installments,  an  extension  of  time  as  to  one  or  more  will not affect the liability of the surety for the others.  But in case  of  an  acceleration  clause,  the  act  of  the  creditor  of extending payment of said installment without guarantor’s consent, discharges the guarantor because this constitutes an extension of the principal obligation. 3.   Prejudice   to   guarantor   and   period   of   extension   is immaterial 4.   Extension must be based on new agreement 5.   Diligence on the part of the creditor to enforce his claim  Art.  2080.  The  guarantors,  even  though  they  be  solidary, are released from their obligation whenever by some act of the  creditor  they  cannot  be  subrogated  to  the  rights, mortgages, and preference of the latter.

84

Page 85: SUMMARY - Salescredit

(1852)  Art. 2081. The guarantor may set up against the creditor all the defenses, which pertain to the principal debtor and are inherent in the debt; but not those that are personal to the debtor. (1853) 

LEGAL AND JUDICIAL BONDS

Art. 2082. The bondsman who is to be offered in virtue of a provision  of  law  or  of  a  judicial  order  shall  have  the qualifications prescribed in Article 2056 and in special laws. (1854a)  BOND > An undertaking that is sufficiently secure, and not cash or currency  Art. 2083. If the person bound to give a bond in the cases of the preceding article, should not be able to do so, a pledge or  mortgage  considered  sufficient  to  cover  his  obligation shall be admitted in lieu thereof. (1855)

 Art.   2084.   A   judicial   bondsman   cannot   demand   the exhaustion of the property of the principal debtor.  A   sub-surety   in   the   same   case,   cannot   demand   the exhaustion of the property of the debtor of the surety.  NOTA BENE: the only important thing in legal and judicial bonds is that it is a surety, it is not entitled to the benefit of excussion.

OBLIGATIONS OF THE BAILEE

  Art.  1941.  The  bailee  is  obliged  to  pay  for  the  ordinary expenses for the use and preservation of the thing loaned. (1743a)  Art. 1942. The bailee is liable for the loss of the thing, even if it should be through a fortuitous event: (1)  If  he  devotes  the  thing  to  any  purpose  different  from that for which it has been loaned; (2) If he keeps it longer than the period stipulated, or after the accomplishment of the use for which the commodatum has been constituted; (3) If the thing loaned has been delivered with appraisal of its value, unless there is a stipulation exemption the bailee from responsibility in case of a fortuitous event; (4) If he lends or leases the thing to a third person, who is not a member of his household; (5) If, being able to save either the thing  borrowed  or  his own thing, he chose to save the latter. (1744a and 1745)  Art. 1943. The bailee does not answer for the deterioration of the thing loaned due only to the use thereof and without his fault. (1746)  Art. 1944. The bailee cannot retain the thing loaned on the ground that the bailor owes him something, even though it may  be  by  reason  of  expenses.  However,  the  bailee  has  a right  of  retention  for  damages  mentioned  in  Article  1951. (1747a) Art.  1945.  When there are two or more bailees to whom a thing  is  loaned  in  the  same  contract,  they  are  liable solidarily. (1748a)  

OBLIGATIONS OF THE BAILEE

1.   The  bailee  is  liable  for  ordinary  expenses—the  borrower should defray the expenses for the use and preservation of the  thing  loaned  for  after  all,  he  acquires  the  use  of  the same and he is supposed to

85

Page 86: SUMMARY - Salescredit

return the identical thing 2.   The  borrower  must  take  good  care  of  the  thing  with  the diligence of a good father of a family (due diligence) 3.   Generally, the borrower would not be liable for the loss of a thing due to a fortuitous event but he would be liable in case of the following circumstances: a.    If  he  devotes  the  thing  to  any  purpose  different from that for which it has been loaned; b.   If he keeps it longer than the period stipulated, or after the accomplishment of the use for which the commodatum has been constituted; c.    If   the   thing   loaned   has   been   delivered   with appraisal  of its value,  unless there is a stipulation exemption the bailee from responsibility in case of a fortuitous event; d.   If  he  lends  or  leases  the  thing  to  a  third  person, who is not a member of his household; e.    If, being able to save either the thing borrowed or his own thing, he  chose to  save the latter. (JPSP: should  be  considered  as  an  exemption.    This  is actually  based  on  ingratitude.    Nonetheless,  this provision  tends  to  control  one’s  instinct  for  self-preservation) 4.   The  bailee  is  not  liable  for  the  deterioration  of  the  thing loaned due only to the use thereof and without his fault 5.   He cannot retain the thing loaned  on the ground that the bailor owes him something, even though it may be for the reason  of  expenses.    He  can  have  the  right  to  retain though  for  damages  as  mentioned  in  Article  1951—“The bailor who, knowing the flaws of the thing loaned, does not advise the bailee of the same, shall be liable to the latter for the damages which he may suffer by reason thereof”. 6.   When  there  are  two  or  more  bailees  to  whom  a  thing  is loaned  in  the  same  contract,  they  are  liable  solidarily  to the bailor a.    To safeguard effectively the rights of the lender b.   Law  presumes  that  the  bailor  takes  into  account the  personal  integrity  and  responsibility  of  all  the bailees  and  that,  therefore,  he  would  not  have constituted  the  commodatum  is  there  were  only one liable  

OBLIGATIONS OF THE BAILOR

1.   The  primary  obligation  of  the  bailor  is  to  allow  the  bailee the use  of the thing loaned for the duration of the  period stipulated  or  until  the  accomplishment  of  the  purpose  for which the commodatum was constituted a.    However,  the  lender  may  demand  its  return  or temporary  use  if  he  has  the  urgent  need  of  the thing   or   if   the   borrower   commits   an   act   of ingratitude 2.   PRECARIUM:  a kind of commodatum where the bailor may demand the thing at will.  In this kind of commodatum, the lender  may  demand  at  will  the  return  of  thing  under  the following circumstances: a.    If neither the duration of the contract nor the use to  which  the  thing  loaned  should  be  devoted,  has been stipulated; or b.   If  the  use  of  the  thing  is  merely  tolerated  by  the owner. c.   the law recognizes the urgency as well as it is gratuitous. d.   Take note that in precarium, there is no stipulated period or the use is merely tolerated 3.   He  may  demand  the  immediate  return  of  the  thing  if  the bailee commits any act of ingratitude a.    If the bailee should commit some offenses against the person, honor or the property of the bailor, or of   his   wife,   and   children   under   his   parental authority b.   If  the  bailee  imputes  to  the  bailor  any  criminal offense or any act involving moral turpitude, even though he should prove it, unless the crime or act has  been  committed  against  himself,  his  wife  and children under his authority c.    If  the  bailee  unduly  refuses  the  bailor  support when the bailee is legally or morally bound to give support  4.   He has the obligation to refund extraordinary expenses for the preservation of the thing loaned—it is him who profits from the said expenses anyway.   a.    As  a rule,  notice is required because it is possible that   the   bailor   may   not   want   to   incur   the extraordinary expenses at all b.   An  exception  of  course  is  where  there  is  urgency that the reply to the notification cannot be awaited

86

Page 87: SUMMARY - Salescredit

without danger c.   you  have  to  determine  if  its  ordinary  or extraordinary d.   why    would    you    advance    for    the extraordinary  expenses  when  you  can  return  the thing and make the lender pay for the expenses? 5.   Regarding, extraordinary expenses arising from the actual use of the thing, the division of liability between the bailor and bailee is 50-50.  This is the default rule but the parties may stipulate for a different apportionment.  6.   For expenses  other than  ordinary expenses and  expenses for the preservation and use of the thing, the bailor is not liable for the same.  7.   He  is  liable  to  the  bailee  for  damages  in  case  he  has knowledge  of  flaws  of  the  thing  loaned,  and  he  didn't advise the bailee of the same a.    There is flaw or defect in the thing loaned b.   The flaw or defect is hidden c.    The bailor is aware thereof d.   He doesn't advise the bailee of the same e.    The  bailee  suffers  damages  by  reason  of  the  said flaw or defect 8.   He cannot excuse himself from liability for any expense or damages by abandoning the thing to the bailee

SIMPLE LOAN OR MUTUUM

 Article 1953. A person who receives a loan of money or any other fungible thing acquires the ownership thereof, and is bound to pay the creditor an equal amount of the same kind and quality  

SIMPLE LOAN OR MUTUUM

>     Contract  whereby  one  of  the  parties  delivers  to  another money    or    another    consumable    thing    with    the understanding that the same amount of the same kind and quality shall be paid >     It  involves  the  return  of  the  equivalent  only  and  not  the identical  thing  because  the  borrower  acquires  ownership thereof  OBLIGATION OF DEBTOR IS TO PAY >     The law uses the word to pay and the word return >     The consumption of the thing loaned  is the distinguishing character   of   the   contract   of   mutuum   from   that   of commodatum >     The promise of the borrower to pay is the consideration for the obligation of the lender to furnish the loan >     A loan is a bilateral contract 

NO ESTAFA IS COMMITTED BY A PERSON WHO REFUSES TO PAY HIS DEBT OR DENIES ITS EXISTENCE

>     The borrower acquires ownership >     Being  the  owner,  the  borrower  can  dispose  of  the  thing borrowed   and   his   act   will   not   be   considered   as appropriation thereof 

FUNGIBLE THINGS

>     Are those which are usually dealt with by number, weight, or measure   

DISTINCTION   BETWEEN   FUNGIBLE   AND   CONSUMABLE THINGS

87

Page 88: SUMMARY - Salescredit

>     Whether  a  thing  is  consumable  or  not  depends  upon  its nature  >     Whether  a  thing  is  fungible  or  not  depends  upon  the intention of the parties

BARTER OR CONTRACT OF EXCHANGE

Article 1954.  A contract whereby one person transfers the ownership   of   non-fungible   things   to   another   with   the obligation  on  the  part  of  the  latter  to  give  things  of  the same  kind,  quantity,  and  quality  shall  be  considered  a barter.

>     One  of  the  parties  binds  himself  to  give  one  thing  in consideration of the other’s promise to give another thing

FORM OF PAYMENT

1.   LOAN  OF  MONEY—if  the  thing  loaned  is  money,  payment must be made in the currency stipulated, if it is possible to deliver  such  currency;  otherwise  it  is  payable  in  the currency  which  is  legal  tender  in  the  Philippines  and  in case  of  extraordinary  inflation  or  deflation,  the  basis  of payment shall be the value of the currency at the time of creation of the obligation a.    Coins  25  cents  and  below:  up  to  P100  is  legal tender b.   Coins  above  25  centavos:  up  to  P1000  is  legal tender (according to BSP Circular of 2007 Series 6) 2.   LOAN  OF  FUNGIBLE  THINGS—if  what  was  loaned  is  a fungible thing other than money, the borrower is under the obligation  to  pay  the  lender  another  thing  of  the  same kind, quality, and quantity.

EQUISITES FOR RECOVERY OF INTEREST 1.   The payment of interest must be expressly stipulated 2.   The agreement must be in writing 3.   The interest must be lawful  EXISTENCE OF STIPULATION TO PAY INTEREST 1.   If a particular rate of interest has been expressly stipulated by  the  parties,  that  interest,  and  not  the  legal  rate  of interest, shall be applied 2.   If the exact rate of interest is not mentioned, the legal rate of 12% shall be payable 3.   No  increase  in  interest  shall  be  due  unless  such  increase has also been expressly stipulated 4.   It is only in contracts of loan, with or without security, that interest may be stipulated and demanded.  5.   The  receipt  of  the  creditor  of  interest  payment  up  to  a certain  date  of  a  loan  that  has  already  matured  does  not ipso  facto  result  in  the  renewal  or  extension  of  maturity period of the loan up to said date. 6.   Stipulation  of  interest  must  be  mutually  agreed  upon  by the parties  and  may  not be  unilaterally increased by only one  of  the  parties.    This  would  violate  consensuality  and mutuality  of  contract  (PNB  v.  CA).    But  the  parties  can agree  upon  a  formula  for  determining  the  interest  rate, over  which  neither  party  has  control  (ex:  interest  will  be adjusted quarterly at a rate of 3% plus the prevailing 91-day T-bill rate, etc.).  But if the formula says “interest will be based on T-bill rates and other interest-setting policies as the bank may determine,” this is not valid.   ESCALATION CLAUSE      Clause  which  authorizes  the  automatic  increase  in  the interest      An  escalation clause is valid when it  is  accompanied by a De-Escalation Clause.  A de-escalation clause is a clause, which  provides  that  the  rate  of  interest  agreed  upon  will also be automatically reduced.  There must be a specified formula  for  arriving  at  the  adjusted  interest  rate,  over which neither party has any discretion.  LIABILITY   FOR   INTEREST   EVEN   IN   THE   ABSENCE   OF STIPULATION 1.   Indemnity for damages—the debtor in delay is liable to pay legal  interest  as  indemnity  for  damages  even  in  the absence of stipulation for the payment of interest

88

Page 89: SUMMARY - Salescredit

a.    Rate of penalty interest agreed upon b.   Interest  cannot  be  recovered  upon  unliquidated claims  or  damages  except  when  the  demand  can be established with reasonable certainty c.    In the absence of express agreement as to the rate of  interest,  CB  Circular  #416  fixes  the  interest  at 12% per annum for loans, forbearance, goods and credits;  and  judgments  involving  such  loans  and forbearance d.   Interest as indemnity for damages is payable only in  case  of  default  or  non-performance  of  the contract 2.   Interest  accruing  from  unpaid  interest—interest  due  shall earn  interest  from  the  time  it  is  judicially  demanded although the obligation may be silent upon this point

WHEN UNPAID INTEREST EARNS INTEREST

1.   When JUDICIALLY DEMANDED 2.   When there is EXPRESS STIPULATION made by the parties to wit: a.    That the interest due an unpaid shall be added to the  principal  obligation  and  the  resulting  total amount shall earn interest b.   Practice called COMPOUNDING INTERES

WHAT IS A TREASURY BILL?

It is an instrument issued by the government when it borrows money. This is used to establish the market rate. The Treasury bill rate is used because generally, the government is thought to be risk-free.

Article 1960.  If the borrower pays interest when there has been  no  stipulation  therefor,  the  provisions  of  this  Code concerning  solutio  indebiti,  or  natural  obligations,  shall  be applied, as the case may be.  RECOVERY OF UNSTIPULATED INTEREST PAID      This  article  means  that  if  unstipulated  interest  is  paid  by mistake, the debtor may recover as this would be the case of solutio indebiti or undue payment      But where the unstipulated interest, or stipulated interest, there  being  a  stipulation  but  not  in  writing,  is  paid voluntarily, the debtor feels morally obliged to do so, there can be no recovery as in the case of natural obligations

Article  1961.    Usurious  contracts  shall  be  governed  by  the Usury  Law  and  other  special  laws,  so  far  as  they  are  not inconsistent with this Code.

WHY  SHOULD  THERE  BE  A  PROVISION  ON  THE  PURPOSE WHEN IT IS ONLY THE CONCERN OF THE BORROWER?  

     It is the risk-management tool  of the lender.  The lender wants  control.  They want it to  go the  business or  stated purpose.  This is one way of ensuring payment.  

WHAT IS A COMMITMENT FEE?  

     The bank being part of the syndicate, you have to pay the fee.  This is similar with the participation fee.  

WHAT  IS  THE  CLAUSE  WHEREIN  THE  BORROWER  WOULD SHOULDER  ALL  FEES?    AN  EXAMPLE  OF  THIS  IS  FUNDING AND YIELD PROTECTION.  

     This is to ensure that the banks would profit from the loan agreement.    

89

Page 90: SUMMARY - Salescredit

DRAWDOWN DATE

     Date  of  giving  of  the  money. 

WHY IS  THE  TREASURY BILL  RATE  DENOMINATED  AS 91-DAY, 182-DAY…? 

     It is because it is divisible by 7 and in a public auction, it would  fall  on  a  business  day.    Another  trivia,  if  it  is  for more  than  one  year,  it  is  called  Treasury  Bonds.    If  it  is longer  than  that,  it  is  called  Cash  Management  Bonds.  

GUARANTY AND SURETYSHIP

(ARTICLES 2047 TO 2084)  NATURE AND EXTENT OF GUARANTY

Article 2047.  By guaranty, a person, called the guarantor, binds  himself  to  the  creditor  to  fulfill  the  obligation  of  the principal debtor in case the latter should fail to do so.  If  a  person  binds  himself  solidarily  with  the  principal debtor, the provisions of Section 4, Chapter 3, Title I of this Book shall be observed.  In such case, the contract is called a suretyship.

GUARANTY

>  Contract between the guarantor and creditor > In a broad sense, it includes pledge and mortgage because the purpose of guaranty may be accomplished not only by securing the fulfillment  of  an obligation contracted  by the principal  debtor  through  the  personal  guaranty  of  a  third person  but  also  by  furnishing  to  the  creditor  for  his security,  property  with  authority  to  collect  the  debt  from the proceeds of the same in case of default.  

CHARACTERISTICS OF A GUARANTY

1.   Accessory—because it is dependent for its  existence upon the principal obligation guaranteed by it 2.   Subsidiary  and  conditional—it  takes  effect  only  when  the principal debtor fails in his obligation subject to limitation 3.   Unilateral— a.    Gives  rise  only  to  the  duty  on  the  part  of  the guarantor  in  relation  to  the  creditor  and  not  vice versa b.   It   may   be   entered   into   even   without   the intervention of the principal debtor 4.   Contract,  which  requires  that  the  guarantor  be  a  distinct person from the principal debtor because a person cannot be the personal guarantor of himself  

CLASSIFICATION OF GUARANTY

1.   Guaranty in the broad sense— a.    Personal—guaranty  properly  so-called  or  guaranty in  the  strict  sense.    The  guarantee  given  is  the credit  given  by  the  person  who  guarantees  the fulfillment of the principal obligation. b.   Real—the   guaranty   is   property,   movable   or immovable 2.   As to its origin a.    Conventional b.   Legal c.    Judicial 

90

Page 91: SUMMARY - Salescredit

3.   As to consideration a.    Gratuitous b.   Onerous 4.   As to persons guaranteed a.    Single b.   Double or sub-guaranty—one constituted to secure the fulfillment of a guarantee in another guaranty 5.   As to its scope and extent a.    Definite—one where the guaranty is limited to the principal  obligation  only,  or  to  a  specific  portion thereof b.   Indefinite   or   simple—one   where   the   guaranty includes  not  only  the  principal  obligation  but  also all its accessories  

SURETYSHIP

> A relation  which exists  where  one person  has  undertaken an obligation and another person is also under a direct and primary obligation or other duty to a third person, who is entitled to but one  performance,  and as between the two who  are  bound,  the  one  rather  than  the  other  should perform > Contractual relation resulting from an agreement whereby one  person,  the  surety,  engages  to  be  answerable  for  a debt,   default,   miscarriage   of   another   known   as   the principal  

LAW APPLICABLE TO SURETYSHIP

>  Second paragraph >  It    covers    OBLIGATIONS,    DIFFERENT    KINDS    OF OBLIGATIONS,   JOINT   AND   SOLIDARY   OBLIGATIONS, OBLIGATIONS AND CONTRACTS >  If  a  person  binds  himself  solidarily  with  the  principal debtor, the contract is called suretyship and the guarantor is called the SURETY 

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PASSIVE SOLIDARITY (SOLIDARITY AMONG DEBTORS) AND SURETYSHIP

The two are SIMILAR in the following ways: 

1.  A  solidary  debtor,  like  a  surety,  STANDS  FOR  SOME  OTHER PERSON.  2.  Both  debtor  and  surety, after payment, may require that they be REIMBURSED.   The  difference  is  that  the  lender  cannot  go  after  the  surety  right away.  There has to be default on the part of the principal debtor before the surety becomes liable.  If it were mere solidarity among debtors,  the  creditor  can  go  after  any  of  the  solidary  debtors  on due date.

NATURE OF A SURETY’S UNDERTAKING 

1.   CONTRACTUAL    AND    ACCESSORY    BUT    DIRECT—The contractual obligation of the surety is merely an accessory or  collateral  to  the  obligation  contracted  by  the  principal.  BUT,  his  liability  to  the  creditor  is  direct,  primary,  and absolute.  2.   LIABILITY IS LIMITED BY THE TERMS OF THE CONTRACT—The extent of a surety’s liability is determined only by the terms   of   the   contract   and   cannot   be   extended   by implication.  3.   LIABILITY  ARISES  ONLY  IF  PRINCIPAL  DEBTOR  IS  HELD LIABLE—If  the  principal  debtor  and  the  surety  are  held liable, their liability to pay the creditor would be  solidary.  But, the surety does not incur liability unless and until the principal debtor is held liable.  a.    A  surety  is  bound  by  a  judgment  against  the principal even though the party was not a party to the proceedings.  b.   The  creditor  may  sue,  separately  or  together,  the principal  debtor  and  the  surety  (since  they  are

91

Page 92: SUMMARY - Salescredit

solidarily bound). c.    Generally,  a  demand  or  notice  of  default  is  not required to fix the surety’s liability.  d.   An   accommodation   party   (one   who   signs   an instrument as maker, drawer, acceptor, or indorser without  consideration  and  only  for  the  purpose  of lending his name) is, in effect, a surety.  He is thus liable to pay the holder of the instrument, subject to reimbursement from the accommodated party.e.    A  surety  bond  is  void  where  there  is  no  principal debtor.  4.   SURETY  IS  NOT  ENTITLED  TO  EXHAUSTION—A  surety  is not  entitled  to  the  exhaustion  of  the  properties  of  the principal  debtor  since  the  surety  assumes  a  solidary liability for the fulfillment of the principal obligation.  5.   THE  UNDERTAKING  IS  TO  THE  CREDITOR,  NOT  TO  THE PRINCIPAL  DEBTOR—The  debtor  cannot  claim  that  the surety  breached  its  obligation  to  pay  for  the  principal obligation  because  there  is  no  obligation  as  between  the surety  and  the  debtor.    If  the  surety  does  not  pay,  the principal debtor is still not relieved of his obligation.  6.   SURETY   NOT   ENTITLED   TO   NOTICE   OF   PRINCIPAL’S DEFAULT—the  surety  is  bound  to  take  notice  of  the principal’s default to perform the obligation 7.   PRIOR DEMAND BY THE CREDITOR UPON  PRINCIPAL NOT REQUIRED—the right of the creditor to proceed against the surety  alone  exists  independently  of  his  right  to  proceed against  the  principal  where  both  surety  and  principal  are equally bound 8.   SURETY  IS  NOT  EXONERATED  BY  NEGLECT  OF  ANOTHER TO SUE PRINCIPAL—mere want of diligence or forbearance doesn’t  affect  the  creditor’s  rights  vis-à-vis  the  surety, unless the surety requires him by appropriate notice to sue on  the  obligation.    The  raison  d’etre  for  the  rule  is  that there  is  nothing  to  prevent  the  creditor  from  proceeding against the principal at any time 

GUARANTY GENERALLY GRATUITOUS

Article  2048.    A  guaranty  is  gratuitous  unless  there  is  a stipulation to the contrary.    >     General rule: a guaranty is gratuitous >     Except when there is a stipulation to the contrary  

WHAT IS THE CAUSE OF A CONTRACT OF GUARANTY?

1.   Presence of cause which supports principal obligation 2.   Absence of direct consideration or benefit to the guarantor

GUARANTY UNDERTAKEN WITHOUT KNOWLEDGE OF DEBTOR / WIFE

Art.  2049.  A  married  woman  may  guarantee  an  obligation without  the  husband’s  consent,  but  shall  not  thereby  bind the conjugal partnership, except in cases provided by law. (n)  Art.   2050.   If   a   guaranty   is   entered   into   without   the knowledge  or  consent,  or  against  the  will  of  the  principal debtor, the provisions of Articles 1236 and 1237 shall apply. (n)  GUARANTY    UNDERTAKEN    WITHOUT    KNOWLEDGE    OF DEBTOR      Always  remember  that  a  guaranty  is  unilateral.    It  exists for the benefit of the creditor and not for the benefit of the debtor.      The  creditor  obviously  has every right to take all possible means to secure the payment of his credit WHAT THEN IS THE RIGHT OF A THIRD PERSON WHO PAYS?      Remember the rules on payment.      A  person  who  pays  without  the  knowledge  or  against  the will of the debtor can recover only insofar as the payment has been  beneficial to the  debtor AND  he  cannot demand the creditor to subrogate him into his rights

92

Page 93: SUMMARY - Salescredit

     If  he  becomes  the  guarantor  with  the  knowledge  and consent  of  the  debtor,  he  is  subrogated  by  virtue  thereof to all the rights which the creditor has against the debtor 

A Guaranty May Be Conventional, Legal or Judicial, Gratuitous, or by Onerous Title

Conventional Guaranty, Legal Guaranty or Judicial Guaranty,  Gratuitous Guaranty, or Guaranty by Onerous Title

Art. 2051. A guaranty may be conventional, legal or judicial, gratuitous, or by onerous title.  It may also be constituted, not only in favor of the principal debtor,  but  also  in  favor  of  the  other  guarantor,  with  the latter’s consent, or without his knowledge, or even over his objection. (1823)  Art.   2052.   A guaranty  cannot  exist  without an valid obligation.  Nevertheless,  a  guaranty  may  be  constituted  to  guarantee the performance of a voidable or an unenforceable contract. It may also guarantee a natural obligation. (1824a)  GUARANTY IS AN ACCESSORY CONTRACT >     It  is  indispensable  for  its  existence  that  there  must  be  a principal obligation >     So if the principal obligation is void, it follows that it is also void  

A GUARANTY MAY SECURE THE PERFORMANCE OF 

1.   A  voidable  contract  inasmuch  as  such  contract  is  binding unless it is annulled by a proper action in court 2.   An unenforceable contract because contract is not void 3.   A  natural  obligation  so  that  the  contract  may  proceed against  the  guarantor  although  he  has  no  right  of  action against the principal debtor for the reason that the latter’s obligation is not civilly enforceable  

CONTINUING GUARANTY OR SURETYSHIP

Art.  2053.  A  guaranty  may  also  be  given  as  security  for future debts, the amount  of  which is not  yet known; there can  be  no  claim  against  the  guarantor  until  the  debt  is liquidated.  A  conditional  obligation  may  also  be  secured. (1825a)>     One  which  isn’t  limited to a single transaction  but  which contemplates a future course of dealings, covering a series of  transactions  generally  for  an  indefinite time or until revoked >     Prospective  in  its  operations  and  is  generally  intended  to provide security with respect to future transactions >     Future debts, even if the amount is not yet known, may be guaranteed but there can be no claim against the guarantor  until  the  amount  of  the  debt  is  ascertained  or fixed and demandable  >     Take  note  however  that  the  abovementioned  provision may  be  misleading  in  sanctioning  guarantees  for  future debts. What  should  be  bore  in  mind  is  that  there  is already  an  existing  obligation  that  is  being  guaranteed. The guaranty would  be void  if  there  is  no  existing obligation.    

HOW ABOUT GUARANTY OF CONDITIONAL OBLIGATIONS

>    If  the  principal  obligation  is  subject  to  a  suspensive condition, the guarantor  is liable  only after the fulfillment of the condition >    If it is subject to a resolutory condition, the  happening  of the condition extinguishes both the principal obligation and the guaranty

93

Page 94: SUMMARY - Salescredit

THE  GUARANTOR’S  LIABILITY  CANNOT EXCEED PRINCIPAL OBLIGATION

Art. 2054. A guarantor may bind himself for less, but not for more than the principal debtor, both as regards the amount and the onerous nature of the conditions.  Should  he  have  bound  himself  for  more,  his  obligations shall be reduced to the limits of that of the debtor. (1826) 1.   Guaranty  is  a  subsidiary  and  accessory  contract—the guarantor  cannot bind himself for more than the principal debtor and even if he does, his liability shall be reduced to the limits of that of the debtor 2.   Interest,  judicial  costs,  attorney’s  fees  as  part  of  the damages may be recovered a.    The  surety  is  made  to  pay  not  by  reason  of  the contract  but  by  reason  of  his  failure  to  pay  when demanded and for having compelled the creditor to resort to the courts to obtain payment b.   Interest  doesn’t  run  from  the  time  the  obligation becomes due but from the filing of the complaint 3.   Penalty may be provided

GUARANTY IS NOT PRESUMED

Art.  2055. A guaranty is not presumed; it must be express and cannot extend to more than what is stipulated therein. If it be simple or indefinite, it shall compromise not only the principal  obligation,  but  also  all  its  accessories,  including the  judicial  costs,  provided  with  respect  to  the  latter,  that the  guarantor  shall  only  be  liable  for  those  costs  incurred after he has been judicially required to pay. (1827a) >     Requires  the  expression  of  consent  on  the  part  of  the guarantor to be bound >     It  cannot  be  presumed  because  of  the  existence  of  a contract or principal obligation >     Why  this  rule?    The  law  wants  not  only  that  there  be assurance that the guarantor has the true intention to bind himself  but  also  to  make  certain  that  on  making  it,  he proceeded with consciousness of what he was doing 

GUARANTY IS COVERED BY THE STATUTE OF FRAUDS

>     A guaranty must not  only be expressed but  must also  be reduced to writing >     Falls  under  the  Statute  since  it  is  a  special  promise  to answer for the debt, default or miscarriage of another

A GUARANTY IS STRICTLY CONSTRUED  

>     It has to be strictly interpreted against the creditor and in favor of the guarantor and isn’t to be extended beyond its terms or specified limits >     The  rule  of  strictissimi  juris  commonly  refers  to  an accommodation  party.    Why?    An  accommodation  surety acts  without  motive  of  pecuniary  gain  and  hence,  should be  protected  against  unjust  pecuniary  impoverishment  by imposing  on  the  principal  duties  akin  to  those  of  a fiduciary.    Take  note  further  that  this  rule  only  applies once it is established that the contract is one of suretyship or guaranty.

IS A STIPULATION  THAT  SAYS  THAT THE GUARANTY WILL SUBSIST ONLY UNTIL MATURITY  OF  THE  OBLIGATION VALID?

> Generally, no.  Such a stipulation would defeat the purpose of  a  guaranty,  which  is  to  answer  for  the  default  of  the principal debtor.  If the guaranty is only up to the date of maturity, there is no way that the guarantor can be liable since default comes only at maturity date. 

EXTENT OF GUARANTOR’S LIABILITY

94

Page 95: SUMMARY - Salescredit

1.   DEFINITE  GUARANTY—limited  in  whole  or  in  part  to  the principal debt, to the exclusion of the accessories.   If the amount to be paid or the service to be performed by the  person  guaranteed  is  specified  in   a   contract  of guaranty, then the obligation of the guarantor extends no further than the sum or services so specified, and extrinsic facts  cannot  be  resorted  to  for  the  purpose  of  enlarging the limit if the guarantor was ignorant of such facts. 2.   INDEFINITE  GUARANTY  OR  SIMPLE  GUARANTY—it  shall compromise  not  only  the  principal  obligation,  but  also  all its  accessories,  including  the  judicial  costs,  provided  with respect to the latter, that the guarantor shall only be liable for  those  costs  incurred  after  he  has  been  judicially required to pay.

 Reason:  the  guarantor  in  entering  into  the  contract  could have fixed the limits of his responsibility solely to the strict terms  of  the  principal  obligation  and  if  he  didn’t  do  so,  it must  be  presumed  that  he  wanted  to  be  bound  to  the extent so established 

ACCEPTANCE  OF  GUARANTY  BY  CREDITOR  AND  NOTICE THEREOF TO GUARANTOR

GENERAL RULE: It is not necessary for the CREDITOR to expressly accept  the  contract  of  guaranty  since  the  contract  is  unilateral; only the guarantor binds himself to do something.   EXCEPTION: If the guarantor merely offers to become a guaranty, it does not become a binding obligation unless the creditor accepts and  notice  of  acceptance is  given to the guarantor. On the  other hand, if the guarantor makes a direct or unconditional promise of guaranty  (and  not  merely  an  offer),  there  is  no  need  for acceptance and notice of such acceptance from the creditor. 

WHAT ARE THE QUALIFICATIONS OF A GUARANTOR?

1.   He possesses integrity

2.   He has the capacity to bind himself

3.   He  has  sufficient  property  to  answer  for  the  obligation which he guarantees

EFFECT OF SUBSEQUENT LOSS OF REQUIRED QUALIFICATIONS

>     Qualifications  need  only  be  present  at  the  time  of  the perfection of the contract

>     The creditor may however demand another guarantor with the proper qualifications but he may waive it if he chooses and hold the guarantor to his bargain

>     Note in Article 2057 that it requires conviction for a crime involving   dishonesty,   but   a   judicial   declaration   of insolvency  is  not  necessary  in  order  for  the  creditor  to have the right to demand another guarantor

SELECTION OF GUARANTOR

1.   Specified   person   stipulated   as   guarantor—where   the creditor has required and stipulated that a specific person should be a guarantor, the substitution of a guarantor may not  be  demanded  because  obviously,  in  such  a  case,  the selection of the guarantor is a term of the agreement and the creditor is bound thereby as a party

2.   Guarantor  selected  by  the  principal  debtor—the  debtor answers  for  the  integrity,  capacity  and  solvency  of  the former

95

Page 96: SUMMARY - Salescredit

3.   Guarantor   personally   designated   by   the   creditor—the responsibility should fall upon the  creditor and  not  on the debtor

RIGHT OF GUARANTOR TO BENEFIT OF EXCUSSION OR EXHAUSTION

1.   Guarantor is only secondarily liable 2.   All legal remedies against debtor to be first exhausted  

RIGHT  OF CREDITOR TO SECURE JUDGMENT AGAINST GUARANTOR PRIOR TO EXHAUSTION

>     As  a  rule,  an  ordinary  personal  guarantor  may  demand exclusion  of  all  the  property  of  debtor  before  he  can  be compelled to pay >     The creditor however may secure prior thereto a judgment against the guarantor, who shall be entitled to a deferment of  the  execution  of  said  judgment  against  him  until  after the properties of the principal debtor shall have been first exhausted to satisfy the latter’s obligation

EXCEPTIONS TO THE BENEFITS OF EXCUSSION

1.   If the guarantor has expressly renounced it;

2.   If he has bound himself solidarily with the debtor;

3.   In case of insolvency of the debtor;

4.   When  he  has  absconded,  or  cannot  be  sued  within  the Philippines unless he has left a manager or representative;

5.   If it may be presumed that an execution on the property of the principal debtor  would not result in the satisfaction of the obligation.

6.   If he doesn’t comply with Article 2060

7.   If he has a judicial bondsman and sub-surety

8.   Where  a  pledge  or  mortgage  has  been  given  by  him  as special security

9.   If he fails to interpose it as a defense before judgment is rendered against him

DUTY OF CREDITOR TO MAKE PRIOR DEMAND FOR PAYMENT FROM GUARANTOR

Art. 2060. In order that the guarantor may make use of the benefit of exclusion,  he must set it up against  the creditor upon the latter’s demand for payment from him, and point out  to  the  creditor  available  property  of  the  debtor  within Philippine  territory,  sufficient  to  cover  the  amount  of  the debt. (1832)

Art.  2061.  The  guarantor  having  fulfilled  all  the  conditions required  in  the  preceding  article,   the  creditor  who  is negligent  in  exhausting  the  property  pointed  out  shall suffer  the  loss,  to  the  extent  of  said  property,  for  the insolvency  of  the  debtor  resulting  from  such  negligence. (1833a)

1.   When demand to be made—only  after  judgment  on  the debt   for   obviously the exhaustion of the principal’s property cannot even being to take place before judgment has been obtained

96

Page 97: SUMMARY - Salescredit

2.   Actual  demand has to be made—the fact that  the guarantor was joined in a suit against the principal debtor necessarily means that a demand has already been made upon him

DUTY OF THE GUARANTOR TO SET UP BENEFIT OF EXCUSSION

> It  isn’t  enough  that  the  guarantor  claims  the  benefit  of excussion

> As soon as he is required to pay, he must also point out to the  creditor  available  property  of  the  debtor  within  the Philippines  

DUTY OF CREDITOR TO RESORT TO ALL LEGAL REMEDIES

> Failure to comply with duty of creditor would mean that he would suffer the loss but only to the extent of the value of said property, for the insolvency of the debtor

JOINDER OF GUARANTOR AND PRINCIPAL AS PARTIES DEFENDANT

> The GENERAL RULE is that the guarantor, not being a joint contractor  with  the  principal,  cannot  be  sued  with  his principal

> EXCEPTION:   not required  when it  would serve  merely to delay the ultimate accounting of the guarantor

PROCEDURE WHEN CREDITOR SUES IN A GUARANTY

Art.  2062.  In  every  action  by  the  creditor,  which  must  be against  the  principal  debtor  alone,  except  in  the  cases mentioned in Article 2059, the former shall ask the court to notify  the  guarantor  of  the  action.  The  guarantor  may appear so that he may, if he so desire, set up such defenses as  are  granted  him  by  law.  The  benefit  of  excussion mentioned in Article 2058 shall always be unimpaired, even if judgment should be rendered against the principal debtor and  the  guarantor  in  case  of  appearance  by  the  latter. (1834a)

PROCEDURE WHEN CREDITOR SUES

1.   SENT  AGAINST  PRINCIPAL—the  creditor  must  sue  the principal  alone.    The  guarantor  cannot  be  sued  together with his principal except when the guarantor is not entitled to the benefit of excussion.

2.   NOTICE  TO  GUARANTOR  OF  THE  ACTION—the  guarantor must be  notified so that  he may appear, if  he so desires, and set up the defenses he may want to offer  a.    If  the  guarantor  appears,  he  is  still  given  the benefit  of  excussion  even  if  judgment  is  rendered against him and the principal debtorb.   If  he   doesn’t   appear,   he  cannot  set  up  the defenses which, by appearing, are allowed him bylaw,  and  it  may  no  longer  be  possible  for  him  to question  the  validity  of  the  judgment  renderedagainst the debtor

3.   HEARING  BEFORE  EXECUTION  CAN  BE  ISSUED  AGAINST GUARANTOR

Compromise In A Contract With Guaranty

Art.  2063.  A  compromise  between  the  creditor  and  the principal   debtor   benefits   the   guarantor   but   does   not prejudice  him.  That  which  is  entered  into  between  the guarantor and the creditor benefits but does not prejudice the principal debtor. (1835a)

COMPROMISE

97

Page 98: SUMMARY - Salescredit

> Contract   whereby   the   parties,   by   asking   reciprocal concessions, avoid a litigation or put an end to one already commenced

EFFECTS OF COMPROMISE

1.   Where   prejudicial—a   contract   binds   only   the   parties thereto  and  not  third  persons.    Hence,  a  compromise cannot prejudice the guarantor or the debtor, as the case may be, when he is not a party to such compromise.

2.   Where  in  the  nature  of  the  stipulation  in  favor  of  third person—however, even if the guarantor or debtor is not a party to  such  compromise, the same  can  still benefit him as  it  is  in  the  nature  of  a  stipulation  in  favor  of  a  third person which the guarantor or debtor may accept unless it has been revoked before his acceptance

SUB-GUARANTOR’S RIGHT TO EXCUSSION

> Enjoys the right with respect to the debtor but also to the principal guarantorArt.  2064.  The  guarantor  of  a  guarantor  shall  enjoy  the benefit of excussion, both with respect to the guarantor and to the principal debtor. (1836)

CREDIT TRANSACTIONS

> Includes all transactions involving the purchase or loan of goods,  services,  money  in  the  present  with  a  promise  to pay or deliver in the future

> Bailment  contracts,  contracts  of  guaranty  and  suretyship, mortgage,  antichresis,  and concurrence  and preference of credits

CREDIT TRANSACTIONS ARE REALLY CONTRACTS OF SECURITY. THEY ARE TWO TYPES:

1.   SECURED   TRANSACTIONS   OR   CONTRACTS   OF   REAL SECURITY—Those   supported   by   a   collateral   or   an encumbrance of property 2.   UNSECURED     TRANSACTIONS     OR    CONTRACTS    OF PERSONAL  SECURITY—those  the  fulfillment  of  which  by the  principal  debtor  is  secured  or  supported  only  by  a promise  to  pay  or  the  personal  commitment  of  another such as a guarantor or surety

WHAT IS A SECURITY?

     It is something given, deposited, or serving as a means to ensure the fulfillment or enforcement of an obligation or of protecting some interest in property      May  be  PERSONAL  SECURITY,  as  when  the  individual becomes a surety or a guarantor; or a PROPERTY OR REAL SECURITY,  as  when  a  mortgage,  pledge,  antichresis, charge or lien or other device used to have property held, out  of  which  the  person  to  be  made  secure  can  be compensated for loss

BAILMENT

> Delivery of property of one person to another in trust for a specific purpose, with a  contract,  express or implied, that the  trust  shall  be  faithfully  executed  and  the  property returned or duly accounted for when the special purpose is accomplished or kept until the bailor reclaims it

98

Page 99: SUMMARY - Salescredit

CREATION OF BAILMENT

>     Generally,  a  bailment  may  be  said  to  be  a  contractual relation>     To  be  legally  enforceable,  it  must  contain  the  essential elements of a valid contract>     It may also be created by operation of law

PARTIES TO A BAILMENT

1.   Bailor—the giver; the party who delivers the possession or custody of the thing bailed2.   Bailee—the   recipient;   the   party   who   receives   the possession and custody of the thing thus delivered

KINDS OF CONTRACTUAL BAILMENT

1.   For the sole benefit of the bailora.    Under this first kind belongs the gratuitous deposit and the mandatumb.   Mandatum—bailment    of    the    goods    without recompense  where  the  mandatory  or  person  towhom  the  property  is  delivered  undertakes  to  do some  act  with  respect  to  the  same;  as  simply  to carry  it,  or  keep  it,  or  otherwise  to  do  something with respect to it gratuitously

2.   For the sole benefit of the baileea.    Commodatum and the simple loan or mutuum

3.   For the benefit of both partiesa.    Deposit  for  a  compensation,  involuntary  deposit, pledge, bailments for hire

> The first two kinds are GRATUITOUS BAILMENTS—there is really no  consideration for they are  considered more as  a favor by one party to the party benefited> The  third  kind  usually  results  from  bailments  involving business transactions—MUTUAL-BENEFIT BAILMENTS

KINDS OF BAILMENT FOR HIRE

>     Bailment for hire arises when goods are left with the bailee for  some  use  or  service  by  him  and  is  always  for  some compensation.

1.   Hire of things (locatio rei)—where goods  are delivered for the temporary use of the hirer2.   Hire  of  service  (locatio  operis  faciendi)—where  goods  are delivered for some work or labor upon it by the bailee3.   Hire   for   carriage   of   goods   (locatio   operis   mercium vehemdarum)—where  goods  are  delivered  either  to  a common  carrier  or  to  a  private  person  for  the  person  of being carried from place to place4.   Hire   of   custody   (locatio   custodae)—where   goods   are delivered for storage

GENERAL PROVISIONS ON LOAN Art.  1933.  By  the  contract  of  loan,  one  of  the  parties delivers  to  another,  either  something  not  consumable  so that  the  latter  may  use  the  same  for  a  certain  time  and return   it,   in   which   case   the   contract   is   called   a commodatum;  or  money  or  other  consumable  thing,  upon the  condition  that  the  same  amount  of  the  same  kind  and quality  shall  be  paid,  in  which  case  the  contract  is  simply called a loan or mutuum.  Commodatum is essentially gratuitous.  Simple loan may be gratuitous  or  with a stipulation to pay interest.

99

Page 100: SUMMARY - Salescredit

 In  commodatum  the  bailor  retains  the  ownership  of  the thing loaned, while in simple loan, ownership passes to the borrower. (1740a)  CONTRACT OF LOAN

>     The  abovementioned  defines  the  two  kinds  of  loan  and gives their characteristics

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CONTRACT

1.   Real contract—because the delivery of the thing loaned is necessary for the perfection of the contract 2.   Unilateral  contract—once  the  subject  matter  has  been delivered, it creates obligations on the part of only one of the parties  

CAUSE OR CONSIDERATION IN A CONTRACT OF LOAN

>     For the borrower—the acquisition of the thing >     For  the  lender—the  right  to  demand  its  return  or  its equivalent  

KINDS OF LOAN

1.   COMMODATUM—where  the  bailor  delivers  to  the  bailee  a non-consumable  thing  so  that  the  latter  may  use  it  for  a certain time and return the identical thing 2.   SIMPLE  LOAN  OR  MUTUUM—where  the  lender  delivers  to the  borrower  money  or  other  consumable  thing  upon  the condition that the latter shall pay he same amount of the same kind and quality  

WHEN IS A THING CONSUMABLE? 

It is consumable when used in  a  manner  appropriate  for  its  purpose  or  nature,  like  gasoline, rice, money, fruit, firewood, etc.  1.   In commodatum, if you do not return the thing when it is due, you will be liable for estafa because ownership of the property is not transferred to the borrower. 2.   In  loan,  the  borrower  who  does  not  pay  is  not  criminally liable for estafa.  His liability is only a civil liability for the breach  of  the  obligation  to  pay.    This  is  because  in  loan, ownership  of  the  thing  is  transferred  to  the  borrower,  so there  is  no  unlawful  taking  of  property  belonging  to another.  Art. 1934. An accepted promise to deliver something by way of commodatum or simple loan is binding upon parties, but the commodatum or simple loan itself shall not be perfected until the delivery of the object of the contract. (n)  

DELIVERY ESSENTIAL TO PERFECTION OF LOAN >     The  abovementioned  is  a  necessary  consequence  of  the fact  that  commodatum  and  mutuum  are  real  contracts which require the delivery of the subject matter thereof for their perfection  ACCEPTED PROMISE TO MAKE A FUTURE LOAN  

>     Is there a contract of loan at this point?  No, because loan is a real contract and is perfected only upon delivery of the thing.   

FORMALITY IN LOAN 

100

Page 101: SUMMARY - Salescredit

>     There are no formal requisites for the validity of a contract of loan except  if there  is  a  stipulation for the  payment  of interest.  A stipulation for the payment of interest must be in writing. 

COMMODATUM

NATURE OF COMMODATUM

Art. 1935. The bailee in commodatum acquires the used of the thing loaned but not its fruits; if any compensation is to be paid by him who acquires the use, the contract ceases to be a commodatum. (1941a)

KINDS OF COMMODATUM

1.   ORDINARY COMMODATUM2.   PRECARIUM—one  whereby  the  bailor  may  demand  the thing loaned at will

Art.   1936.   Consumable   goods   may   be   the   subject   of commodatum  if  the  purpose  of  the  contract  is  not  the consumption   of   the   object,   as   when   it   is   merely   for exhibition. (n)

Art.  1937.  Movable  or  immovable  property  may  be  the object of commodatum. (n)

Art.  1938.  The  bailor  in  commodatum  need  not  be  the owner of the thing loaned. (n)

Art.  1939.  Commodatum  is  purely  personal  in  character .

Consequently:

(1)   The  death of   either the bailor or the bailee extinguishes the contract;

(2)  The  bailee  can  neither  lend  nor  lease  the  object  of the contract to a third person. However, the members of the bailee's  household  may  make  use  of  the  thing  loaned, unless  there  is  a  stipulation  to  the  contrary,  or  unless  the nature of the thing forbids such use. (n)

Art. 1940. A stipulation that the bailee may make use of the fruits of the thing loaned is valid. (n)NATURE OF COMMODATUM SUMMARIZED

1.   COMMODATUM IS ESSENTIALLY GRATUITOUS  a.    A commodatum is essentially gratuitous  b.   The  contract  ceases  to  be  a  commodatum  if  any compensation  is  to  be  paid  by  the  borrower  who acquires the usec.    A  commodatum  is  similar  to  a  donation  in  that  it confers a benefit to the recipient

2.   EXTENT OF BAILEE’S RIGHT TO USE is limited to the thing loaned  but  not  to  the  fruits  unless  there  is  stipulation  to the contrarya.    As the bailor is the owner of the thing loaned, the bailor is naturally entitled to its fruits

3.   CAN  THERE  BE  A  STIPULATION  GRANTING  THE  BAILEE USE OF THE FRUITS?  Of course.  The law sanctions such stipulation BUT such use should only be incidental and not the main  cause of the contract.  Because if it is the main cause, then the contract may that one of a usufruct.

4.   The  PURPOSE  of  a  commodatum  is  the  temporary  use  of thing loaneda.    If the bailee is not entitled to the use of the thing loaned, the contract may be that of deposit

5.   The  SUBJECT  MATTER  is  generally  a  non-consumable things, whether real or personala.    It  may  be  the  case  that  the  purpose  is  for exhibition  only  of  the  thing  loaned.    If  this  is  the case, 

101

Page 102: SUMMARY - Salescredit

then  the  subject  matter  may  be  that  of  a consumable thing

6.   The bailor NEED NOT BE THE OWNER of thing loaned  

7.   Commodatum is PURELY PERSONAL in character.

Consequently:a.    The  death   of  either  the  bailor   or  the  bailee extinguishes the contract;b.   The bailee can neither lend nor lease the object of the  contract  to  a  third  person.  However,  themembers of the bailee's household may make use of the thing loaned, unless there is a stipulation tothe  contrary,  or  unless  the  nature  of  the  thing forbids such use.

AYSON-SIMON VS. ADAMOS 131 SCRA 439

FACTS: On December 13, 1943, Nicolas Adamos and Vicente Feria defendants-appellants herein purchased two lots from Juan Porciuncula. Porciuncula’s successor in interest sought for the annulment and cancellation of the sale which the court a quo favorably ruled.

In the meantime during the pendency of the above mentioned case, defendants-appellants sold to Generosa Ayson Simon the lots in question. Due to the failure of defendants appellants to comply with their commitment to have the subdivision plan  of the lots approved and to deliver to deliver the  titles and possession to Generosa, the latter filed suit for specific performance. As a result of the sale of the lot to said defendants sppellants being null and void, there is impossibity that they can comply with  their commitment to Generosa, the latter then seek the rescission of the contract plus damages.

The defendants-appellants  contend that Generosa’s action had prescribed, considering that she had only four years from May 29, 1946 to rescind the transaction.ISSUE:

Whether or not the action to rescind the obligation has prescribed.

HELD: Article 1191 of the Civil Code provides that an injured party may also seek rescission  if the fulfillment should have become impossible. The cause of action to claim rescission arises when the fulfillment of the obligation became imppossible when the court declared that the sale was null and void. The Generosa cannot be assailed on the  ground that she slept on her rights.

Nature Of The Benefit Of Excussion

The benefit of excussion is a right granted to the guarantor and, therefore, only he may invoke it at his discretion.The benefit of excussion, as well as the requirement of consent to extensions of payment, is a protective device pertaining to and conferred on the guarantor. These may be invoked by the guarantor against the creditor as defenses to bar the unwarranted enforcement of the guarantee. However, Philguarantee did not avail of these defenses when it paid its obligation according to the tenor of the guarantee once demand was made on it.

When to invoke benefit of excussion.

The benefit of excussion may only be invoked after legal remedies against the principal debtor have been expanded. Thus, it was held that the creditor must be first obtain a judgment against the principal debtor before assuming to run after the alleged guarantor, “for obviously the ‘exhaustion of the principal’s property’ cannot even begin to take place before judgment has been obtained”. The law imposes conditions precedent for the invocation of the defense. Thus, in order that the guarantor may make use of the benefit of excussion,

102

Page 103: SUMMARY - Salescredit

he must set it up against the creditor upon the latter’s demand for payment and point out to the creditor available property of the debtor within the Philippines sufficient to cover the amount of the debt. (Article 2060, NCC; JN Dev. Corp. vs. Phil. Export & Foreign Guarantee Corp., G.R. No. 151060, August 31, 2005).

Pactum Commissorium

In Luisa Briones – Velasquez vs. CA, et al., G.R. No. 144882, February 4, 2005, the Supreme Court once again said that if there is an equitable mortgage, the creditor cannot consolidate his ownership in case the debtor does not pay. The proper remedy is to foreclose it. The reason is founded on Article 2088, NCC which provides that the creditor cannot appropriate the things given by way of pledge or mortgage, or dispose of them. Any stipulation to the contrary is null and void.Applying the principle of pactum commissorium specifically to equitable mortgages, in Montevergin vs. CA, 112 SCRA 641 (1982) it has been said that the consolidation of ownership in the person of the mortgagee in equity, merely upon failure of the mortgagor in equity to pay the obligation, would amount to a pactum commissorium. It was further articulated that an action for consolidation of ownership is an inappropriate remedy on the part of the mortgagee in equity. The only proper remedy is to cause the foreclosure of the mortgagee in equity. And if the mortgagee in equity desires to obtain title to the mortgaged property, the mortgagee in equity may buy it at the foreclosure sale.

DRAGNET CLAUSE, MORTGAGEDragnet clause in a mortgage contract; nature; reason.

A “blanket mortgage clause”, also known as a “dragnet clause” is one which is specifically phrased to subsume all debts of past or future origins. Mortgages of this character enable the parties to provide continuous dealings, the nature or extent of which may not be known or anticipated at the time, and they avoid the expense and inconvenience of executing a new security on each new transaction. A “dragnet clause” operates as a convenience and accommodation to the borrowers as it makes available additional funds without their having to execute additional security documents, thereby saving time, travel, loan closing costs, costs of extra legal services, recording fees, et cetera. Indeed, it has been settled in a long line of decisions that mortgages given to secure future advancements are valid and legal contracts (Mojica vs. CA, G.R. No. 94247, September 11, 1991, 201 SCRA 517),and the amounts named as consideration in said contracts do not limit the amount for which the mortgage may stand as security if from the four corners of the instrument the intent to secure future and other indebtedness can be gathered. (China Banking Corp. vs. CA, 333 Phil. 158 (1996); Prudential Bank vs. Don A. Alviar, et al., G.R. No. 150197, July 28, 2005; Cuyco vs. Cuyco, 487 SCRA 693 (2006)).

The foreclosure should be limited for the amount of P250, 000.00 because the other obligations were secured by other securities. The mortgage with such a clause will not secure a note that expresses that it is secured by another security. When the mortgagor takes a loan for which another security was given it could not be inferred that such loan was made in reliance solely on the original security with the dragnet clause but rather on the new security given. It is therefore improper for the bank to foreclose the mortgaged properties because of non – payment of all the three promissory notes for there is a need to respect the existence of the other securities given for other loans. (Prudential Bank vs. Alviar, et al., G.R. No. 150197, July 28, 2005).

A mortgage with a “dragnet clause” is an “offer” by the mortgagor to the bank to provide the security of the mortgage for advances of and when they were made. It can be said that the “offer” was not accepted by the bank when a subsequent advance was made because of a new security. (Prudential Bank vs. Alviar, et al., G.R. No. 150197, July 28, 2005).

Indivisibility of mortgage.

The law provides that a pledge or mortgage is indivisible. Explaining the meaning of the law, the Supreme Court said that it simply means that there can be no partial foreclosure of the mortgage.

No right to lease while there is an existing lease contract

103

Page 104: SUMMARY - Salescredit

The rule is that, when there is a lease contract, the lessor is obliged to maintain the lessee in the peaceful and adequate enjoyment of the lease for the entire duration of the contract. (Art. 1654, NCC). This is true only if the contract is valid, unlike in this case, where the contract is void, for having an existing contract of lease, hence, the lessor has no right to lease the same property. When the lessor entered into the contract, he was still obliged to maintain peaceful and adequate possession and enjoyment of its lease with the other lessee. (Bercero v. Capitol Dev’t. Corp., G.R. No. 154765, March 29, 2007).

Basic Duty Of The Lessor In Relation To The Lessee

The lessor must see that the enjoyment is not interrupted or disturbed, either by others’ acts x x x or by his own. By his own acts, because, being the person principally obligated by the contract, he would openly violate it if, in going back on his agreement, he should attempt to render ineffective in practice the right in the thing he had granted to the lessee; and by others’ acts, because he must guarantee the right he created, for he is obligated to give warranty in the manner set forth in Article 1553, and, in this sense, it is incumbent upon him to protect the lessee in the latter’s peaceful enjoyment. (Manresa; CMS Investment & Mgt. Corp. v. IAC, 139 SCRA 75 (1985; Goldstein v. Roces, 34 Phil. 562 (1916); Barcero v. Capitol Dev’t. Corp., G.R. No. 154765, March 29, 2007).

When the obligation to ensure enjoyment of the use of the premises arise?

The obligation of the lessor arises only when acts, termed as legal trespass (perturbacion de derecho), disturb, dispute, object to, or place difficulties in the way of the lessee’s peaceful enjoyment of the premises that in some manner or other cast doubt upon the right of the lessor by virtue of which the lessor himself executed the lease, in which case the lessor is obligated to answer for said act of trespass. The lessee has the right to be respected in his possession and should he be disturbed therein, he shall be restored to said possession by the means established by the law or by the Rules of Court. Possession is not protection against a right but against the exercise of a right by one’s own authority. (Bercero v. Capitol Dev’t. Corp., G.R. No. 154765, March 29, 2007).

Assignment of Lease Distinguished from Subleasing

Once again, the SC in BPI-Family Savings Bank v. Sps. Domingo, et al., G.R. No. 158676, November 27, 2006, the distinctions between subleasing and assignment of lease were made.

In a sublease situation, the lessee continues to be liable to the lessor for the payment of rent. The sublessee pay rent not to the lessor but to the lessee/sub-lessor. On the other hand, in an assignment of rights, the assignee steps into the shoes of the lessee who is thereupon freed from his obligations under the lease because from then on it is the assignee who is liable to the lessor for rental payment. In other words, in an assignment of rights, there is a change of lessor, which is not so in a sublease situation. It is thus understandable why it is not necessary for the lessor to give his consent to a sublease, while in an assignment of rights, it is a necessity for the lessor to require his prior consent. This is for the lessor’s own protection.

Surrender Of Leased Premises

In Remington Industrial Sales Corp. v. Chinese Young Men’s Christian Assn. of the Phil. Islands, etc., G.R. No. 171858, January 22, 2007, there was a lease contract over the ground floor and the second floor of a building. Due to disagreement on the rental, the lessee filed a petition for consignation but later on made a “Formal Surrender of the Leased Premises” over the ground floor. It however retained the key of the door or passage way to the second floor as it was using the same. Is there surrender of the premises? Why?

Held: Yes, effectively it was surrendered and vacated.

In a contract of lease, one of the parties binds himself to give to another the enjoyment or use of a thing for a

104

Page 105: SUMMARY - Salescredit

price certain, and for a period which may be definite or indefinite. Upon its termination, the lessee shall return the thing leased and the lessor shall resume possession thereto. (Art. 1665, NCC).

Under the law, possession is acquired by the material occupation of a things or the exercise of a right, or by the fact that it is subject to the action of our will, or by the proper acts and legal formalities established for acquiring such right. (Art. 531, NCC). In short, possession can be either actual or merely constructive. (Rep. v. David, G.R. No. 155634, August 16, 2004; 436 SCRA 571).

Actual possession consists in the manifestation of acts of dominion over property of such a nature as a party would naturally exercise over his own – as when respondent himself is physically in occupation of the property, or even when another person who recognizes the former’s right as owner is in occupancy. Constructive possession, on the other hand, may be had through succession, donation, execution of public instruments, or the possession by a sheriff by virtue of a court order.

When there was “Formal Surrender of Leased Premises” the defendant actually emptied and vacated the leased premises.

The padlocking of the main door of the ground floor units and the continued use thereof as defendant’s passageway to and from the second floor unit did not virtually denied it of its right to possess the unit. There was intention to relinquish in favor of plaintiff its possession over the premises. The filing of the Formal Surrender at the MeTC-Manila, constituted its constructive delivery of the said premises. Thereafter, it actually emptied and vacated the premises. Therefore, the plaintiff could have taken legal and actual possession of premises. It could have easily removed the padlock and occupied the premises in view of its unconditional surrender of the premises.

Immovables Contributed Into Partnership

Effect if immovables are contributed into the partnership.

In Litonjua, Jr. vs. Litonjua, Sr., et al., G.R. No. 166299-300, December 13, 2005, it was once again said that the contract – validating inventory requirement under Article 1773 of the Civil Code applies as long as real property or real rights are initially brought into the partnership. In short, it is really of no moment which of the partners contributed immovables. In context, the more important consideration is that real property was contributed, in which case an inventory of the contributed property duly signed by the parties should be attached to the public instrument, else there is legally no partnership to speak of.

Agency Coupled With Interest- Not Revocable At Will

As developer of the permanent improvement on the Property, BDAI has an interest in the Property that is the subject matter of the agency, assuming such agency exists. An agency coupled with interest is not revocable at the will of principal. In Sevilla vs. CA, 160 SCRA 171, it was said:

“The reason is that it is one coupled with an interest, the agency having been created for the mutual interest of the agent and the principal. It appears that Lina Sevilla is a bona fide travel agent herself, and as such, she had acquired an interest in the business entrusted to her. Moreover, she had assumed a personal obligation for the operation thereof, holding herself solidarily liable for the payment of rentals. She continued the business, using her own name, after Tourist World had stopped further operations. Her interest, obviously, is not limited to the commissions she earned as a result of her business transactions, but one that extends to the very subject matter of the power of management delegated to her. It is an agency that cannot be revoked at the pleasure of the principal. (Bacaling vs. Muya, 430 Phil. 531 (2002); Wheelers Club International, Inc. vs. Bonifacio, Jr., G.R. No. 139540, June 29, 2005; Lim vs. Saban, G.R. No. 163720, December 11, 2004).

Commission Of Agents

105

Page 106: SUMMARY - Salescredit

It is dictum that in order for an agent to be entitled to a commission, he must be the procuring cause of the sale, which simply means that the measures employed by him and the efforts he exerted must result in a sale. (Damon vs. Antonio Brimo & Co., 42 Phil. 134; Ramos vs. CA, 63 SCRA 331). In other words, an agent receives his commission only upon the successful conclusion of a sale. (Hahn vs. CA, G.R. No. 113074, January 22, 1997, 266 SCRA 537). Conversely, it follows that where his efforts are unsuccessful, or there was no effort on his part, he is not entitled to a commission.In this case, the contract was negotiated directly by the parties after the agency was revoked due to his refusal to reduce his commission. Revocation is allowed by law which states that the agency is revoked if the principal directly manages the business entrusted to the agent, dealing directly with third persons. (Art. 1924, NCC).

The agent was not the procuring cause of the contract between the parties, hence, he is not entitled to commission. (Sanchez vs. Medicard Phils. Inc., et al., G.R. No. 141525, September 2, 2005).

Duty Of A Person Dealing With An Agent

It is a settled rule that persons dealing with an agent are bound at their peril, if they would hold the principal liable, to ascertain not only the fact of agency but also the nature and extent of authority, and in case either is controverted, the burden of proof is upon them to establish it. (YU Eng Cho vs. Pan American World Airways, 385 Phil. 453 (2000). The basis for agency is representation and a person dealing with an agent is put upon inquiry and must discover upon his peril the authority of the agent. (Safric Alcan & Cie vs. Imperial Vegetable Oil Co., Inc., 355 SCRA 559). If he does not make such an inquiry, he is chargeable with knowledge of the agent’s authority and his ignorance of that authority will not be any excuse. (Bacaltos Coal Mines vs. CA, 245 SCRA 460; Manila Memorial Park Cemetery, Inc. vs. Pedro Linsangan, G.R. No. 151319, November 22, 2004).

Broker Is Entitled To Compensation If He Is The Procuring Cause

The brokers are entitled to their commission because they were instrumental in the sale of the property. Without their intervention, no sale could have been consummated. They were the ones who set the sale in motion, or the procuring cause. A broker is generally defined as one who engaged, for others, on a commission, negotiating contracts relative to property with the custody of which he has no concern; the negotiator between other parties, never acting in his own name but in the name of those who employed him; he is strictly a middleman and for some purposes the agent of both parties. A broker is one whose occupation is to bring parties together, in matters of trade, commerce or navigation. (Tan vs. Gullas, 393 SCRA 330 (2002); (Medrano, et al. vs. CA, et al., G.R. No. 150678, February 18, 2005 (Callejo, J)).

DEPOSIT

Under the law, the hotel-keeper cannot free himself from responsibility by posting notices to the effect that he is not liable for the articles brought by the guest. Any stipulation between the hotel-keeper and the guest whereby the responsibility of the former as set forth in Articles 1998 to 2001 is suppressed or diminished shall be void. (Art. 2003, NCC).

Article 2003 was incorporated in the New Civil Code as an expression of public policy precisely. The hotel business like the common carrier’s business is imbued with public interest. Catering to the public, hotel-keepers are bound to provide not only lodging for hotel guests and security to their persons and belongings. The twin duty constitutes the essence of the business. The law in turn does not allow such duty to the public to be negated or diluted by any contrary stipulation in so-called “undertakings” that ordinarily appear in prepared forms imposed by hotel-keepers on guests for their signature. (YHT Realty Corp. v. CA, et al., G.R. No. 126780, February 17, 2005).

GUARANTY and SURETY- G.R. No. 151060

106

Page 107: SUMMARY - Salescredit

The claim that Philguarantee had no more obligation to pay TRB because of the expiration of the contract of guarantee is untenable. The mere fact that payment was made after the expiration of the guarantee is not controlling. What is controlling is that demand on Philguarantee had taken place while the guarantee was still in force.

There is no basis for JN’s claim that Philguarantee was a mere volunteer payor and had no legal obligation to pay TRB. The law does not prohibit the payment by a guarantor on his own violation, heedless of the benefit of excussion. In fact, it recognizes the right of a guarantor to recover what it has paid, even if payment was made before the debt becomes due, or if made without notice to the debtor, subject of course to some conditions. (JN Dev. Corp., et al. vs. Phil. Export & Foreign Loan Guarantee Corp., G.R. No. 151060, August 31, 2005).

When there is solidarity in an obligation

The Undertaking or contract to secure a loan agreement uses the word “sureties” althroughout the document in describing the parties. It is further contended that the principal objective of the parties in executing the Undertaking cannot be attained unless they are solidarily liable “because the total loan obligation can not be paid or settled to free or release the Obligors if one or any of the Sureties default from their obligation in the Undertaking.”

The contention is not correct. In case there is a concurrence of two or more creditors or of two or more debtors in one and the same obligation, Article 1207 of the Civil Code states that among them, there is a solidary liability only when the obligation expressly so states, or when the law or the nature of the obligation requires solidarity. Article 1210 supplies further caution against the broad interpretation of solidarity by providing: “The indivisibility of an obligation does not necessarily give rise to solidarity. Nor does solidarity of itself imply indivisibility.”

These Civil Code provisions establish that in case of concurrence of two or more creditors or of two or more debtors in one and the same obligation, and in the absence of express and indubitable terms characterizing the obligation as solidary, the presumption is that the obligation is only joint. It thus becomes incumbent upon the party alleging that the obligation is indeed solidary in character to prove such fact with a preponderance of evidence.

The Undertaking does not contain any express stipulation that the parties agreed “to bind themselves jointly and severally” in their obligations, or any such terms to that effect. hence, such obligation established in the Undertaking is presumed only to be joint. (Escaño, et al. v. Ortigas, Jr., G.R. No. 151953, June 29, 2007, Tinga, J).

The use of “SURETIES” 13 times does not sufficiently establish that the obligation is solidary in nature.

The term “surety” has a specific meaning under the Civil Code. Article 2047 provides the statutory definition of a surety agreement, that by guaranty a person, called the guarantor, binds himself to the creditor to fulfill the obligation of the principal debtor in case the latter should fail to do so.

If a person binds himself solidarily with the principal debtor, the provisions of Section 4, Chapter 3, Title I of this Book shall be observed. In such case the contract is called a suretyship.

As provided in Article 2047, in a surety agreement the surety undertakes to be bound solidarily with the principal debtor. Thus, a surety agreement is an ancillary contract as it presupposes the existence of a principal contract. The argument rests solely on the solidary nature of the obligation of the surety under Article 2047. In tandem with the nomenclature “SURETIES”, this argument can only be viable if the obligations established in the Undertaking do partake of the nature of suretyship as defined by Article 2047, NCC, otherwise, the liability is joint. (Escaño, et al. v. Ortigas, Jr., G.R. No. 151953, June 29, 2007, Tinga, J).

107

Page 108: SUMMARY - Salescredit

Nature Of Suretyship Agreement

As indicated by Article 2047, a suretyship requires a principal debtor to whom the surety is solidarily bound by way of an ancillary obligation of segregate identity from the obligation between the principal debtor and the creditor. The suretyship does bind the surety to the creditor, inasmuch as the latter is vested with the right to proceed against the former to collect the credit in lieu of proceeding against the principal debtor for the same obligation. At the same time, there is also a legal tie created between the surety and the principal debtor to which the creditor is not privy or party to. The moment the surety fully answers to the creditor for the obligation created by the principal debtor, such obligation is extinguished. At the same time, the surety may seek reimbursement from the principal debtor for the amount paid, for the surety does in fact “become subrogated to all the rights and remedies of the creditor.” (Escaño, et al. v. Ortigas, Jr., G.R. No. 151953, June 29, 2007, Tinga, J, citing Palmares v. CA).

Note:

“Since, generally, it is not necessary for a creditor to proceed against a principal in order to hold the surety liable, where, by the terms of the contract, the obligation of the surety is the same as that of the principal, then as soon as the principal is in default, the surety is likewise in default, and may be sued immediately and before any proceedings are had against the principal.” (Palmares v. CA, 351 Phil. 664, 685 (1998) citing Standard Accident Insurance Co. v. Standard Oil Co., 133 So. 2d 539; School District No. 65 of Lincoln County v. Universal Surety Co., 135 N. W. 2d 232; Depot Realty Syndicate v. Enterprise Brewing Co., 171 P. 223).

Distinction Between A Joint And Several Debtor And A Surety

In the case of joint and several debtors, Article 1217 makes plain that the solidary debtor who effected the payment to the creditor “may claim from his co-debtors only the share which corresponds to each, with the interest for the payment already made.” Such solidary debtor will not be able to recover from the co-debtors the full amount already paid to the creditor, because the right to recovery extends only to the proportional share of the other co-debtors, and not as to the particular proportional share of the solidary debtor who already paid. In contrast, even as the surety is solidarily bound with the principal debtor to the creditor, the surety who does pay the creditor has the right to recover the full amount paid, and not just any proportional share, from the principal debtor or debtors. Such right to full reimbursement falls within the other rights, actions and benefits which pertain to the surety by reason of the subsidiary obligation assumed by the surety. (Escaño, et al. v. Ortigas, Jr., G.R. No. 151953, June 29, 2007, Tinga, J).

Article 2047 itself specifically calls for the application of the provisions on solidary obligations to suretyship contracts. Article 1217 of the Civil Code thus comes into play, recognizing the right of reimbursement from a co-debtor (the principal debtor, in case of suretyship) in favor of the one who paid (i.e., the surety). However, a significant distinction still lies between a joint and several debtor, on one hand, and a surety on the other. Solidarity signifies that the creditor can compel any one of the joint and several debtors or the surety alone to answer for the entirety of the principal debt. The difference lies in the respective faculties of the joint and several debtor and the surety to seek reimbursement for the sums they paid out to the creditor.

A guarantor who binds himself in solidum with the principal debtor under the provisions of the second paragraph does not become a solidary co-debtor to all intents and purposes. There is a difference between a solidary co-debtor and a fiador in solidum (surety). The latter, outside of the liability he assumed to pay the debt before the property of the principal debtor has been exhausted, retains all the other rights, actions and benefits which pertain to him by reason of the fiansa; while a solidary so-debtor has no other rights than those bestowed upon him in Section 4, Chapter 3, Title I, Book IV of the Civil Code.

The second paragraph of [Article 2047] is practically equivalent to the contract of suretyship. The civil law suretyship is, accordingly, nearly synonymous with the common law guaranty; and the civil law relationship existing between the co-debtors liable in solidum is similar to the common law suretyship. (Tolentino, Civil Code of the Phils. (1992 ed.).

108

Page 109: SUMMARY - Salescredit

Right To Full Reimbursement By The Surety

The right under Article 2066, NCC which assures the guarantor who pays for a debtor must be indemnified, such indemnity comprising of among others, the total amount of the debt. Furthermore, Article 2067 of the Civil Code likewise establishes that the guarantor who pays is subrogated by virtue thereof to all the rights which the creditor had against the debtor. (Escaño, et al. v. Ortigas, Jr., G.R. No. 151953, June 29, 2007, Tinga, J).

NCC Refer Not Only To Guarantors But To Surety As Well

Article 2066 and 2067, NCC explicitly pertain to guarantors. The argument that the provisions should not extend to sureties, especially in light of the qualifier in Article 2047 that the provisions on joint and several obligations should apply to sureties is not correct. The reference in the second paragraph of [Article 2047] to the provisions of Section 4, Chapter 3, Title I, Book IV, on solidary or several obligations, however, does not mean that suretyship is withdrawn from the applicable provisions governing guaranty. (Manila Surety & Fidelity Co. v. Barter Construction &  Co., et al., 53 Off. Gaz. 8836 & Arranz v. Manila Fidelity & Surety, Co., 53 Off. Gaz. 7247). For if that were not the implication, there would be no material difference between the surety as defined under Article 2047 and the joint and several debtors, for both classes of obligors would be governed by exactly the same rules and limitations.

Accordingly, the right to indemnification and subrogation as established and granted to the guarantor by Articles 2066 and 2067 extend as well to sureties as defined under Article 2047. These rights granted to the surety who pays materially differ from those granted under Article 1217 to the solidary debtor who pays, since the indemnification that pertains to the latter the share which corresponds to each debtor. (Escaño, et al. v. Ortigas, Jr., G.R. No. 151953, June 29, 2007).

When solidary debtor who pays is entitled to reimbursement.

If a solidary debtor pays the obligation in part, he can recover reimbursement from the co-debtors only in so far as his payment exceeded his share in the obligation. This is precisely because if a solidary debtor pays an amount equal to his proportionate share in the obligation, then he in effect pays only what is due from him. If the debtor pays less than his share in the obligation, he cannot demand reimbursement because his payment is less than his actual debt. (Republic Glass Corp. v. Qua, G.R. No. 144413, July 30, 2004).

Death Not An Escape To Liability

Death is not a defense that he or his estate can set up to wipe out the obligations under the performance bond. Consequently, petitioner as surety cannot use his death to escape its monetary obligation under its performance bond. (Stronghold Insurance Company, Inc. vs. Republic – Asahi Glass Corp., G.R. No. 147561, June 22, 2006).

Surety’s obligation is not original; but direct and primary to creditor

The surety’s obligation is not an original and direct one for the performance of his own act, but merely accessory or collateral to the obligation contracted by the principal. Nevertheless, although the contract of a surety is in essence secondary only to a valid principal obligation, his liability to the creditor or promise of the principal is said to be direct, primary and absolute; in other words, he is directly and equally  bound with the principal. (Garcia vs. CA, 191 SCRA 439 (1990); IFC vs. Imperial Textile Mills, Inc., G.R. No. 160324, November 15, 2005).

Under the law and jurisprudence, the creditor may sue, separately or together, the principal debtor and the surety, in view of the solidary nature of their liability. The death of the principal debtor will not work to convert, decrease or nullify the substantive right of the solidary creditor. Evidently, despite the death of the

109

Page 110: SUMMARY - Salescredit

principal debtor, the creditor may still sue petitioner alone, in accordance with the solidary nature of the latter’s liability under the performance bond. (Stronghold Insurance Co., Inc. vs. Republic – Asahi Glass Corp., supra.).

Cabales, et al. v. CA, et al., G.R. No. 162421

A property was the subject of co-ownership. Some of the co-owners sold the whole property without the consent of the two others, Nelson, a minor and his mother. Explaining the nature of the sale, the SC ruled:

The sale insofar as their shares are concerned is unenforceable because it was entered into in the name of another person by one who had not given authority. (Art. 1403(1), NCC). Nelson and his mother, therefore, retained ownership over their undivided share of subject property. (Cabales, et al. v. CA, et al., G.R. No. 162421, August 31, 2007).

Non-Involvement Clause In a Contract

Non-involvement clause in a contract; valid, provided there is limitation as to time, place and trade.

In Daisy Tiu v. Platinum Plans, Inc., G.R. No. 163512, February 28, 2007, the petitioner was employed as Division Marketing Director of the respondent, a pre-need company. In 1995, she stopped working and became the Vice President for Sales of Professional Pension Plans, Inc., another pre-need company. She was sued for damages for violating her contract with respondent which prohibited her in a business of the same nature within two (2) years separation, whether voluntary or involuntary. The RTC and the CA held her liable. Before the SC, the petitioner contended that the non-involvement clause is offensive to public policy since the restraint imposed is much greater than what is necessary to afford respondent a fair and reasonable protection. She added that since the products sold in the pre-need industry are more or less the same, the transfer to a rival company is acceptable. She likewise argued that a strict application of the non-involvement clause would deprive her of the right to engage in the only work she knows.

Respondent countered that the validity of a non-involvement clause has been sustained by the Supreme Court in a long line of cases. It contended that the inclusion of the two-year non-involvement clause in the contract of employment was reasonable and needed since her job gave her access to the company’s confidential marketing strategies. It added that the non-involvement clause merely enjoined her from engaging in pre-need business akin to respondents within two years from her separation from respondent. She had not been prohibited from marketing other service plans. In brushing aside respondent’s contention, the SC

Held: As early as 1916, the validity of a non-involvement clause has already been discussed. In Ferazzini v. Gsell, 34 Phil. 697 (1916), it was held that such clause was unreasonable restraint of trade and therefore against public policy. In Ferrazzini, the employee was prohibited from engaging in any business or occupation in the Philippines for a period of five years after the termination of his employment contract and must first get the written permission of his employer if her were to do so. The Court ruled that while the stipulation was indeed limited as to time and space, it was not limited as to trade. Such prohibition, in effect, forced an employee to leave the Philippines to work should his employer refuse to give a written permission.

In G. Martini, Ltd. v. Glaiserman, 39 Phil. 120 (1918), a similar stipulation was declared as void for being unreasonable restraint of trade. There, the employee was prohibited from engaging in any business similar to that of his employer for a period of one year. Since the employee was employed only in connection with the purchase and export of abaca, among the many business of the employer, the restraint was considered too broad since it effectively prevented the employee from working in any other business similar to his employer even if his employment was limited only to one of its multifarious business activities.

However, in Del Castillo v. Richmond, 45 Phil. 679 (1974), a similar stipulation was upheld as legal, reasonable, and not contrary to public policy. In the said case, the employee was restricted from opening, owning or having any connection with any other drugstore within a radius of four miles from the employer’s

110

Page 111: SUMMARY - Salescredit

place of business during the time the employer was operating his drugstore. A contract in restraint of trade is valid provided there is a limitation upon either time or place and the restraint upon one party is not greater than the protection the other party requires.

Finally, in Consulta v. Court of Appeals, G.R. No. 145443, March 18, 2005, 453 SCRA 732, a non-involvement clause was held in accordance with Article 1306 of the Civil Code. While the complainant in that case was an independent agent and not an employee, she was prohibited for one year from engaging directly or indirectly in activities of other companies that compete with the business of her principal. The restriction did not prohibit the agent from engaging in any other business, or from being connected with any other company, for as long as the business or company did not compete with the principal’s business. Further, the prohibition applied only for one year after the termination of the agent’s contract and was therefore a reasonable restriction designed to prevent acts prejudicial to the employer.

Conformably with the aforementioned pronouncements, a non-involvement clause is not necessarily void for being in restraint of trade as long as there are reasonable limitations as to time, trade, and place.

In this case, the non-involvement clause has a time limit: two years from the time petitioner’s employment with respondent ends. It is also limited as to trade, since it only prohibits petitioner from engaging in any pre-need business akin to respondents.

In this case what makes the non-involvement clause valid is that, she had been privy to confidential and highly sensitive marketing strategies of respondent’s business. To allow her to engage in a rival business soon after she leaves would make respondent’s trade secrets vulnerable especially in a highly competitive marketing environment. In sum, the non-involvement clause is not contrary to public welfare and not greater than is necessary to afford a fair and reasonable protection to respondent. (Ollendorff v. Abrahamsom, 38 Phil. 585 (1918)).

In any event, Article 1306 of the Civil Code provides that parties to a contract may establish such stipulations, clauses, terms and conditions as they may deem convenient, provided they are not contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order, or public policy.

Article 1159 of the same Code also provides that obligations arising from contracts have the force of law between the contracting parties and should be complied with in good faith. Courts cannot stipulate for the parties nor amend their agreement where the same does not contravene law, morals, good customs, public order or public policy, for to do so would be to alter the real intent of the parties, and would run contrary to the function of the courts to give force and effect thereto. (Phil. Communications Satellite Corp. v. Telecom, Inc., G.R. Nos. 147324 and 147334, May 25, 2004, 429 SCRA 153).

TRUSTS- Implied Trusts, Constructive Trusts

When one’s property is registered in another’s name without the former’s consent, an implied trust is created by law in favor of the true owner. Implied trusts are those which, without being expressed, are deducible from the nature of the transaction by operation of law as matters of equity, independently of the particular intention of the parties. Meanwhile, constructive trusts are created in order to satisfy the demands of justice and prevent unjust enrichment. They arise against one who, by fraud, duress or abuse of confidence, obtains or holds the legal right to property which he ought not, in equity and good conscience, to hold. An action for reconveyance based upon an implied or constructive trust prescribes in ten (10) years from the registration of the deed or from the issuance of the title.

IMPLIED TRUST- Action to Recover Based on Implied Trust

Action to recover based on implied trust; prescribes after 10 years; except if plaintiff is in possession.

111

Page 112: SUMMARY - Salescredit

Once again, the Supreme Court ruled in Consuelo Vda. de Gualberto, et al. vs. Francisco Go, et al., G.R. No. 139843, July 21, 2005 that an action for reconveyance of real property based on implied or constructive trust is not barred by the 10-year period of prescription only if the plaintiff is in actual, continuous and peaceful possession of the property involved. In DBP vs. CA, 331 SCRA 267 (2000) it was said that generally an action for reconveyance based on an implied or constructive trust prescribes in 10-years from the date of issuance of the decree of registration. However, this rule does not apply when the plaintiff is in actual possession of the land.

If property is acquired through mistake or fraud, the person obtaining it is, by force of law, considered a trustee of an implied trust for the benefit of the person from whom the property comes. (Art. 1456, NCC). Thus, the law thereby creates the obligation of the trustee to reconvey the property and the title thereto in favor of the true owner. The prescriptive period for the reconveyance for fraudulently registered real property is ten (10) years reckoned from the date of the issuance of the certificate of title. (Consuelo Vda. de Alberto, et al. vs. Francis Go, et al., G.R. No. 139843, July 21, 2005).

Implied Trust If Property Is Acquired By Fraudulent Act

The act of petitioners in misrepresenting that they were in actual possession and occupation of the property, obtaining patents and original certificates of title in their names, created an implied trust in favor of the actual possessors of the property. Under the law, if the property is acquired through mistake or fraud, the person obtaining it is, by force of law, considered a trustee of an implied trust for the benefit of the person from whom the property comes. (Art. 1456, NCC).

In other words, if the registration of the land is fraudulent, the person in whose name the land is registered holds it as a mere trustee, and the real owner is entitled to file an action for reconveyance of the property. (Mendizabel, et al. vs. Apao, et al., G.R. No. 143185, February 20, 2006).

Torrens Systems Not Designed To Shield Against Fraud

Reconveyance is just and proper in order to terminate the intolerable anomaly that the patentees should have a Torrens title for the land which they and their predecessors never possessed and which has been possessed by another person in the concept of owner. After all, the Torrens system was not designed to shield and protect one who had committed fraud or misrepresentation and thus holds title in bad faith. (Mendizabel, et al. vs. Apao, et al., G.R. No. 143185, February 20, 2006).

Action For Reconveyance Based On Implied Trust

An action for reconveyance of registered land based on implied trust prescribes in 10 years, the point of reference being the date of registration of the deed or the date of the issuance of the certificate of title over the property. This is especially if the plaintiff is in possession of the property at the time of the filing of the complaint that the 10 – year prescriptive period applies only when the person enforcing the trust is not in possession of the property. If a person claiming to be its owner is in actual possession of the property, the right to seek reconveyance, which in effect seeks to quiet title to the property, does not prescribe. The reason is that the one who is in actual possession of the land claiming to be its owner may wait until his possession is disturbed or his title is attacked before taking steps to vindicate his right. His undisturbed possession gives him a continuing right to seek the aid of a court of equity to ascertain and determine the nature of the adverse claim of a third party and its effect on his own title, which right can be claimed only by one who is in possession. (Mendizabel, et al. vs. Apao, et al., G.R. No. 143185, February 20, 2006).

OBLIGATIONS AND CONTRACTS- FORTUITOUS EVENT,  Robbery

Robbery per se is not a fortuitous event.

112

Page 113: SUMMARY - Salescredit

In Sicam, et al. v. Jorge, et al., G.R. No. 159617, August 8, 2007, Lulu Jorge pawned several pieces of jewelry with Agencia de R.C. Sicam to secure a loan in the amount of P59,500.00. It was alleged that two armed men entered the pawnshop and took away whatever cash and jewelry found inside the pawnshop vault. It was reported to the police. She sued for damages but Sicam interposed the defense of fortuitous event, alleging that there was robbery. The SC brushed aside the contention and said:

Robbery per se, just like carnapping, is not a fortuitous event. It does not foreclose the possibility of negligence on his part.

In a case similarly situated, it was ruled that:

“It is not a defense for a repaid shop of motor vehicles to escape liability simply because the damage or loss of a thing lawfully placed in its possession was due to carnapping. Carnapping per se cannot be considered as a fortuitous event. The fact that a thing was unlawfully and forcefully taken from another’s rightful possession, as in cases of carnapping, does not automatically give rise to a fortuitous event. To be considered as such, carnapping entails more than the mere forceful taking of another’s property. It must be proved and established that the event was an act of God or was done solely by third parties and that neither the claimant nor the person alleged to be negligent has any participation. In accordance with the Rules of Evidence, the burden of proving that the loss was due to a fortuitous event rests on him who invokes it – which in this case is the private respondent. However, other than the police report of the alleged carnapping incident, no other evidence was presented by private respondent to the effect that the incident was not due to its fault. A police report of an alleged crime, to which only private respondent is privy, does not suffice to establish the carnapping. Neither does it prove that there was no fault on the party of private respondent notwithstanding the parties’ agreement at the pre-trial that the car was carnapped. Carnapping does not foreclose the possibility of fault or negligence on the part of private respondent. (Co. v. CA, 353 Phil. 305 (1998); Sicam, et al. v. Jorge, et al., G.R. No. 159617, August 8, 2007).

In another case, it was held that to be relieved from civil liability of returning the pendant under Article 1174 of the Civil Code, it would only be sufficient that the unforeseen event, the robbery, took place without any concurrent fault on the debtor’s part, and this can be done by preponderance of evidence; that o be free from liability for reason of fortuitous event, the debtor must, in addition to the case itself, be free from any concurrent or contributory fault or negligence. (Sicam, et al. v. Jorge, et al., supra.).

113